682330
2
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/783
Next page
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF635Cx / MF633Cdw /
MF631Cn
User's Guide
USRMA-1739-04 2018-04 en Copyright CANON INC. 2018
Contents
Setting Up
............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Main Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 6
Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 8
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ............................................................................................................................ 10
Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................. 12
Setting Up the Network Environment ...................................................................................................................... 14
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 16
Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 17
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 18
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................................... 20
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ........................................................................................... 22
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 24
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ...................................................................................... 27
Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 30
Setting IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................... 31
Setting IPv4 Address ..................................................................................................................................... 32
Setting IPv6 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 35
Viewing Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 38
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ...................................................................................... 40
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ........................................................................................... 41
Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................... 44
Setting Up Print Server .................................................................................................................................. 48
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ......................................................................................... 51
Conguring Ethernet Settings ........................................................................................................................ 52
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ...................................................................................................... 54
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .............................................................................................. 55
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 56
Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 60
Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 62
Registering LDAP Servers .............................................................................................................................. 64
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 69
Other Network Settings ................................................................................................................................. 73
Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 78
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ........................................................................................................... 79
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use .............................................................................................................. 80
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name .......................................................................................................... 81
Selecting the Receive Mode .................................................................................................................................. 82
Connecting the Telephone Line ............................................................................................................................ 83
Conguring Scan Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 84
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ........................................................................................................... 85
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax ................................................................................... 86
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................... 87
I
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings ............................................................................................
90
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ........................................................................................ 94
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ....................................................................................................... 95
Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location ............................................................................................. 98
Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 101
Parts and Their Functions ...................................................................................................................................... 104
Front Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 105
Insert a USB Memory Device ........................................................................................................................ 107
Back Side ......................................................................................................................................................... 109
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 110
Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 111
Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................................................... 112
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................... 113
Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 115
Turning ON the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 117
Turning OFF the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 118
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ...................................................................................................................... 119
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................... 121
Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................... 122
Home Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 123
<Status Monitor> Screen ............................................................................................................................. 126
Message Display ......................................................................................................................................... 128
Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 129
Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................... 132
Logging in to the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 134
Placing Originals ................................................................................................................................................... 136
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 140
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .................................................................................................................... 142
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................. 149
Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................................................................ 154
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................. 157
Specifying Paper Size and Type .......................................................................................................................... 159
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................... 160
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ................................................................................ 162
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................... 164
Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................. 166
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ................................................................................................................ 167
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................................ 168
Customizing the Display ........................................................................................................................................ 169
Customizing the Home Screen ........................................................................................................................... 170
Registering Frequently Used Settings .................................................................................................................. 173
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .......................................................................................................... 175
Setting Sounds ...................................................................................................................................................... 177
Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 179
II
Registering Destinations .......................................................................................................................................
181
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 183
Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ................................................................................................. 186
Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................. 188
Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 190
Copy Basic Features Screen ................................................................................................................................... 192
Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................................................................... 194
Canceling Copies .............................................................................................................................................. 199
Checking the Copying Status and Log ................................................................................................................. 200
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ................................................................................................................... 202
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ........................................................................................................... 203
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) ...................................................................................................... 204
Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame) ............................................................................................... 205
Adjusting the Color ........................................................................................................................................... 206
Useful Copy Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 207
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) .......................................................................................... 208
Collating Copies by Page ................................................................................................................................... 209
Making ID Card Copies ...................................................................................................................................... 210
Faxing .................................................................................................................................................................. 212
Fax Basic Features Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 215
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ....................................................................................................................... 216
Canceling Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................... 224
Receiving Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 225
Useful Functions When Sending ............................................................................................................................. 228
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) ............................................................................. 229
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ............................................................................................... 232
Saving a Copy of a Sent Original ......................................................................................................................... 234
Various Receiving Methods .................................................................................................................................... 235
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ........................................................................ 236
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ............................................................................................... 238
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents .................................................................................... 240
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .......................................................................................................... 242
Sending PC Faxes ............................................................................................................................................. 243
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ...................................................................................................................................... 245
Sending I-Faxes ................................................................................................................................................ 246
Receiving I-Faxes .............................................................................................................................................. 253
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 255
Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 256
Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 258
Checking the Printing Status and Log .................................................................................................................. 260
Various Printing Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 262
III
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ............................................................................................
263
Printing via Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 264
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) .................................................................................... 267
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................... 276
Scan Basic Features Screen .................................................................................................................................... 278
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ................................................................................................................ 281
Scanning and Saving to a Computer .................................................................................................................... 282
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................................. 284
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server ..................................................................... 288
Canceling Sending Documents ........................................................................................................................... 297
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals .................................................................................................... 298
Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................... 300
Adjusting Image Quality .................................................................................................................................... 301
Adjusting Density ............................................................................................................................................. 302
Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ................................................................................................. 303
Useful Scanning Functions .................................................................................................................................... 305
Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files ............................................................................................................ 306
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size) ......................................................................... 309
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ................................................................... 310
Specifying E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................................. 313
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .......................................................................................................... 316
Scanning Documents from an Application ........................................................................................................... 317
Using ScanGear MF ........................................................................................................................................... 319
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 321
Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 322
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ........................................................................................ 323
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................................. 325
Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 329
Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 330
Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 335
Scanning with AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................... 338
Faxing with AirPrint .......................................................................................................................................... 340
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 342
Using Google Cloud Print ....................................................................................................................................... 343
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 345
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 348
Setting Access Privileges ....................................................................................................................................... 350
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN .............................................................................................................. 351
Setting the Department ID Management ............................................................................................................. 353
Setting a Remote UI PIN .................................................................................................................................... 359
LDAP Server Authentication ............................................................................................................................... 361
IV
Conguring the Network Security Settings
............................................................................................................ 365
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 367
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings .................................................................................................. 368
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings .............................................................................................. 371
Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 374
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 375
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 377
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 380
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 383
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 386
Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 388
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings .................................................................................................. 395
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 399
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions .................................................................................... 401
Restricting Use of the Address Book ............................................................................................................. 402
Limiting Available Destinations ..................................................................................................................... 404
Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ........................................................................................................... 406
Restricting Printing from a Computer .................................................................................................................. 408
Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 409
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 411
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 412
Increasing the Security of Documents .................................................................................................................... 413
Generating a Device Signature Key ..................................................................................................................... 414
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 415
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 416
Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 419
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 424
Registering Destinations from Remote UI ............................................................................................................ 427
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data ................................................................................................................. 431
Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 434
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 436
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 439
<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 440
<Display Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 441
<English Keyboard Layout> ................................................................................................................................ 445
<Timer/Energy Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 446
<Network> ....................................................................................................................................................... 451
<External Interface> .......................................................................................................................................... 465
<Accessibility> .................................................................................................................................................. 466
<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 467
<Adjust Image Quality> ..................................................................................................................................... 468
<Maintenance> ................................................................................................................................................ 482
<Function Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 484
<Common> ...................................................................................................................................................... 485
V
<Copy>
............................................................................................................................................................ 490
<Printer> ......................................................................................................................................................... 492
<Send> ............................................................................................................................................................ 537
<Receive/Forward> ........................................................................................................................................... 548
<Store/Access Files> .......................................................................................................................................... 555
<Secure Print> .................................................................................................................................................. 563
<Set Destination> .................................................................................................................................................. 564
<Management Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 565
<User Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 566
<Device Management> ...................................................................................................................................... 567
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> ..................................................................................... 571
<Data Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 573
<Security Settings> ........................................................................................................................................... 575
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 578
Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 580
Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 581
Cleaning the Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................. 582
Cleaning the Feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 583
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 586
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .......................................................................................................................... 588
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 589
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 594
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 595
Adjusting Image Quality ....................................................................................................................................... 597
Adjusting Gradation .......................................................................................................................................... 598
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ...................................................................................................................... 603
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility ..................................................................................................... 604
Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 606
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 608
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 610
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 615
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 618
Common Problems ................................................................................................................................................ 620
Installation/Settings Problems ........................................................................................................................... 621
Copying/Printing Problems ................................................................................................................................ 625
Faxing/Telephone Problems ............................................................................................................................... 628
When You Cannot Print Properly ............................................................................................................................ 630
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ................................................................................................................... 632
Paper Creases or Curls ...................................................................................................................................... 644
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ..................................................................................................................................... 647
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed .................................................................... 648
Countermeasures for Each Message ................................................................................................................... 649
VI
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
................................................................................................................ 663
Clearing Paper Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 673
Paper Jams in the Feeder ................................................................................................................................... 675
Paper Jams in the Main Unit ............................................................................................................................... 677
Paper Jams in a Paper Source ............................................................................................................................. 680
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 685
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 687
Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 689
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 690
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 691
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 693
Going Digital .................................................................................................................................................... 695
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 697
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 699
Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 700
Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 704
Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 705
Cassette Feeding Module-AF .............................................................................................................................. 709
Copy Card Reader-F .......................................................................................................................................... 710
Fax Function .................................................................................................................................................... 711
Scan Function .................................................................................................................................................. 712
Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 713
Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 715
System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 718
Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 720
Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 721
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 722
System Options ................................................................................................................................................ 724
Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 726
Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 727
Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 728
Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 731
Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 732
Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 740
VII
Setting Up
Setting Up ...............................................................................................................................................................
3
Main Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 6
Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 8
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................... 10
Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 12
Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 14
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 16
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 17
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 18
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 20
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 22
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 24
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 27
Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 30
Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 31
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 32
Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 35
Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 38
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 40
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 41
Conguring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 44
Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 48
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 51
Conguring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 52
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 54
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 55
Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 56
Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 60
Conguring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 62
Registering LDAP Servers ......................................................................................................................... 64
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 69
Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 73
Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 78
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ................................................................................................... 79
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use ....................................................................................................... 80
Setting Up
1
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name ..................................................................................................
81
Selecting the Receive Mode ............................................................................................................................ 82
Connecting the Telephone Line ...................................................................................................................... 83
Conguring Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................... 84
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ................................................................................................... 85
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax ......................................................................... 86
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................ 87
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings ................................................................................... 90
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................. 94
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................................. 95
Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location ................................................................................... 98
Setting Up
2
Setting Up
1W2X-000
Befor
e using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check
the sequences of ow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings.
Preparations Required
Befor
e Use(P. 6)
The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you pur
chased. Before using the
machine, see
Main Functions(P. 4) and check the available functions.
Conguring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)
Y
ou can easily congure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network
settings, by following the on-screen guidance.
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 10)
Setting Up
3
Main Functions
1W2X-001
This manual co
vers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function : Without function
Function MF735Cx MF734Cdw MF732Cdw MF635Cx MF633Cdw MF631Cn
Copy
Fax
Print
Scan
Feeder / Platen glass cover Feeder (2-
sided
scanning)
Feeder (2-sided
scanning)
Feeder (1-sided
scanning)
Feeder (2-
sided
scanning)
Feeder (1-sided
scanning)
Platen glass
co
ver
2-sided printing
Wireless LAN
NFC
Default System Manager ID 7654321 Not specied Not specied 7654321 Not specied Not specied
Default System Manager PIN 7654321 Not specied Not specied 7654321 Not specied Not specied
Application Library
Cassette Feeding Module-AF *
TELEPHONE 6 KIT *
Copy Card Reader-F *
Barcode Printing Kit
*
Send PDF Security Feature Set
*
*
This is an optional item.
For the available driver types, see the User Softwar
e DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see the Canon
website (http://www.canon.com/).
Setting Up
4
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 731)
Setting Up
5
Preparations Required Before Use
1W2X-002
Set up the machine follo
wing steps 1 to 5 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go
to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check
Preventing Unauthorized
Access(P
. 8) .
Step 1 Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 10)
Step 2 Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)
Congur
e the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need
to use the Setup Guide, congure the network settings from here.
Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 78)
Step 4 Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
(P. 79)
Step 5 Conguring Scan Settings
(P. 84)
Setting Up
6
Setting from the Remote UI
When the network envir
onment settings are complete, you can eciently set the machine from a computer
using Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
Importing data fr
om another machine to save time
As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/
multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Setting Up
7
Preventing Unauthorized Access
1W2X-003
This section describes the security measur
es on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 8)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 9)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 9)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 9)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed fr
om the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
Fr
om 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32) .
If a global IP addr
ess is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
Setting Up
8
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administr
ator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A r
ewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P
. 368) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see
Conguring the Network Security Settings
(P. 365) ,
and on the procedures to specify, see
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
If a malicious thir
d party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines
enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For mor
e information, see
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 359) .
Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For mor
e information, see
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351) .
Addr
ess Book PIN
For more information on setting a PIN, see
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402) .
Listed abo
ve are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see
Managing the Machine(P. 348) and tak
e necessary security measures for
preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Setting Up
9
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
1W2X-004
When the machine is turned on (
Turning ON the Machine(P. 117) ) for the rst time, the Setup Guide starts up to
assist you to congur
e the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the
setting screens are displayed in the following order.
Step 1 Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the
country or r
egion where the machine will be used.
1
Select a language.
2
Select <Yes>.
3
Select a country or region.
Step 2 Setting the Date and Time
Adjust the machine's date/time.
1
Select a time zone.
What is UTC?
Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the
world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required
for Internet communications.
2
Enter the date and time, and select <Apply>.
Tap the entry eld, and enter the date and time.
Step 3 Setting the Access Security Measures
Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine
settings fr
om a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.
1
Select <Yes>.
If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.
You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.
Setting
a Remote UI PIN
(P. 359)
2
Enter a PIN, and then select <Apply>.
3
Enter the same PIN, and then select <Apply>.
Step 4 Performing the Color Adjustment
To achieve good copy quality, adjust the gradation.
1
Select <Yes>.
If you select <No>, color adjustment is not performed, and the Setup Guide
pr
oceeds to step 5.
2
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
Setting Up
10
3
Conrm the pr
ocedure, and select <Start>.
An adjustment image is printed.
4
Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing is closed.
5
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.
Place the adjustment image with the print side facing do
wn and the black
stripe toward the back side of the machine.
6
Gently close the feeder.
7
Select <Start Scanning>.
Adjustment starts.
When adjustment is complete, r
emove the adjustment image from the platen
glass.
Step 5 Setting the Wireless LAN
Congure the settings to connect to the network using the wir
eless LAN.
1
Select <Yes>.
If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to
step 6.
2
Select <OK>.
3
Select the setting method.
For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see
Connecting to a
Wir
eless LAN(P. 18) .
Step 6 Viewing Application Library
The one-touch button referred to as "Application Library" is provided in the Home screen. You
can r
ead the description of each function.
1
To nish the Setup Guide, select <End>.
When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home screen appears.
Setting Up
11
Setting the Date/Time
1W2X-005
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time ar
e used as the reference for the functions specifying the
time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Time Zone(P. 12)
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 12)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 13)
Setting the Time Zone
If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time
Zone>.
3
Select the time zone.
What is UTC?
Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC
time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Setting the Current Date and Time
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.
3
Enter the date and time.
T
ap the entry eld, and enter the date and time.
Setting Up
12
4
Select <Apply>.
Set <Time Zone> befor
e setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
The display format of the date and time can be changed, r
espectively.
<Date Format>(P. 447)
<Time Format>(P. 447)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates fr
om which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Saving Time Settings>.
3
Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
When you select <On>, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item. T
o set
the day, specify "what day of which week."
4
Select <Apply>.
Setting Up
13
Setting Up the Network Environment
1W2X-006
When connecting the machine to a wir
ed or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
If the machine is connected to an unsecur
ed network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
The machine cannot connect to both wir
ed and wireless LANs at the same time.
The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Befor
e You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
Mak
e sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication
method or the Ethernet type (
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 52) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 39)
Setting Up
14
T
o connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see
Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication Settings
(P. 395) .
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
Pr
oceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Set the IP address as necessary.
At the time of pur
chase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address.
Setting IP
Addr
esses(P. 31)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 40)
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 51)
Setting Up
15
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
1W2X-007
After you decide on wir
ed or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4
Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up
16
Connecting to a Wired LAN
1W2X-008
Connect the machine to a computer via a r
outer. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect a LAN cable.
Connect the machine to a r
outer by using a LAN cable.
Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2
Wait for several minutes.
The IP addr
ess is set automatically.
Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)
Setting Up
17
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
1W2X-009
Wir
eless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 18)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 19)
Risk of information leak
Use wir
eless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
The machine does not come with a wir
eless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes ar
e available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)
Setting Up
18
PIN Code Mode
Some WPS r
outers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code.
Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P
. 22)
If the wir
eless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wir
eless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Selecting a Wir
eless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network k
ey to set up the connection.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)
Setting Up
19
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
1W2X-00A
If your wir
eless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
Ho
w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences>
<Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6
Select <Yes>.
7
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
The button must be pr
essed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Select <Close> and r
eturn to step 5.
8
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
Setting Up
20
9
Select <Close>.
W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 122)
Reducing power consumption
Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 452)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up
21
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
1W2X-00C
If your wir
eless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
Ho
w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
3
Select <Preferences>
<Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
4
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
6
Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7
Select <Yes>.
The PIN code is gener
ated and shown on the display.
From a Computer
8
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
Register the PIN code on the setup scr
een displayed in step 1.
Setting Up
22
The PIN code must be r
egistered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Select <Close> and r
eturn to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9
Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
10
Select <Close>.
W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function.
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Reducing power consumption
Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 452)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up
23
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
1W2X-00E
Y
ou can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key (
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30) ).
Security settings
If the wir
eless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using <Enter Manually>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences>
<Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>.
6
Select <Select Access Point>.
The machine starts sear
ching for available wireless routers.
If
a message is displayed telling that access point cannot be found, see
Countermeasures for Each
Message
(P. 649) .
7
Select a wireless LAN router.
Select the r
outer whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and select <Next>.
Setting Up
24
To view details of security settings
Select the wir
eless LAN router, and select <Details>. To return to the original screen, select
.
If your wir
eless router is not found
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/
Settings Pr
oblems(P. 621)
8
Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network k
ey, and select <Apply>.
On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
9
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Select <Close>, check whether the network k
ey is correct, and return to step 5.
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
11
Select <Close>.
W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function.
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Reducing power consumption
Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 452)
Setting Up
25
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP envir
onment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up
26
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
1W2X-00F
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wir
eless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>
<Enter Manually>.
6
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
Enter the SSID
, and select <Apply>.
On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
7
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.
Using WEP
1
Select <WEP>.
2
Select an authentication method.
Setting Up
27
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "
open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
When connecting to a wir
eless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3
Select the WEP key you want to edit.
Select the WEP key (1 to 4), and select <Edit>.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
4
Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
5
Select the desired WEP key.
Select the WEP key you have edited, and select <Register>.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2
Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-C
CMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3
Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
Setting Up
28
8
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Select <Close>, check whether the specied settings ar
e correct, and return to step 5.
9
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
10
Select <Close>.
W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function.
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 452)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up
29
Checking the SSID and Network Key
1W2X-00H
When manually setting up a wir
eless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID A name given for identifying a specic wir
eless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
Setting Up
30
Setting IP Addresses
1W2X-00J
Connecting the machine to a network r
equires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
Setting Up
31
Setting IPv4 Address
1W2X-00K
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addr
essing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports (
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17) ). Y
ou can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 33)
Setting IPv4 Address
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
4
Congure IP addr
ess settings.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP addr
ess via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic
addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,
the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select <On> in <Auto Acquire>, and select <Select Protocol>.
3
Select <DHCP>.
Setting Up
32
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services ar
e unavailable, the machine will waste time
and communications resources searching the network for these services.
4
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
5
Select <Apply>.
IP addr
esses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>, and select <Off> <Apply> in <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select <Manually Acquire>.
3
Enter <IP Address>, <Subnet Mask>, and <Gateway Address>, and select <Apply>.
5
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (
Testing the Network Connection(P. 33) ).
When you have changed the IP addr
ess after installing the printer driver
When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong
to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used,
you need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports
(P. 44)
*
If you do not know which port is used, see
Checking the Printer Port(P. 737) .
Testing the Network Connection
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
Setting Up
33
4
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.
If a pr
oper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
Conguring WINS
(P. 62)
Setting Up
34
Setting IPv6 Addresses
1W2X-00L
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congur
ed via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings (
Viewing IPv4
Settings(P
. 38) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not
available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use the following multiple IPv6
addresses:
Type Description
Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
de
vices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default
router address.
Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [IPv6 Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congur
e the required settings.
Setting Up
35
[Use IPv6]
Select the check bo
x to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Stateless Address 1]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
Mak
e sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
Setting Up
36
Selecting settings from the operation panel
IPv6 settings can also be accessed fr
om <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv6 Settings>(P. 455)
When you have changed the IP addr
ess after installing the printer driver
You need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
Setting Up
37
Viewing Network Settings
1W2X-00R
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 38)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 38)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 39)
The IP addr
ess is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating.
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
Y
ou can print a list of the current network settings.
User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 612)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the
settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the
settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
The MA
C address is displayed.
Setting Up
38
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Connection Information>.
6
Select the setting to view.
Viewing security information
T
o view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, select <Security Settings>.
Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen
<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor>.
<Status Monitor>
<Network Information> <Network Connection Type> Select the setting to view
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
Conguring DNS(P
. 56)
Setting Up
39
Conguring Settings for Communication with a
Computer
1W2X-00S
Specify the pr
otocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before conguring the
machine for printing or faxing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41)
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Setting Up Print Server(P. 48)
Pr
otocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and
can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the
network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.
Setting Up
40
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions
1W2X-00U
Congur
e the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Congure printing pr
otocols.
Conguring LPD or RAW
1
Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings]
[Edit].
2
Congure the settings as necessary
.
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check bo
x to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set
time, printing is canceled.
3
Click [OK].
Setting Up
41
Conguring WSD
1
Select [WSD Settings] [Edit].
2
Congure the settings as necessary
.
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check bo
x to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use WSD Scanning]
WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select
the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.
[Use Computer Scanning]
Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check
box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, select
<Scan> in the Home screen and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination (
Scanning
and Saving to a Computer(P
. 282) ).
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3
Click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
LPD
, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<LPD Settings>(P. 457)
<RAW Settings>(P. 457)
<WSD Settings>(P. 458)
Setting up WSD network de
vices
The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder (
Displaying the
Printer Folder(P
. 732) )
click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For
Setting Up
42
more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
T
o change the port number
The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374)
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Setting Up
43
Conguring Printer Ports
1W2X-00W
Printing err
ors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the
computer.
T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
Click the [Ports] tab and congur
e the required settings.
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP addr
ess of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and
"Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type according to your environment.
MFNP Port
(only for IPv4 envir
onment)
This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.
Even if the IP addr
ess of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,
provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need
to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine
in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.
Y
ou can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided
DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver or the fax
driver from the Canon website.
Setting Up
44
Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a
ne
w port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of
port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot
add an MFNP port.
Adding an MFNP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
Click [Refr
esh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or
MAC address of the machine (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ) and then click [Ne
xt].
4
Click [Add]
[Finish].
5
Click [Close].
Adding a standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Click [Next].
4
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
The [Port Name] is enter
ed automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
Setting Up
45
When the ne
xt screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*
When you select the [De
vice Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5
Click [Finish].
6
Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing pr
otocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side (
Conguring Printing
Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41) ) or the port number has been changed (
Changing Port
Numbers(P
. 374) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
MFNP port
1
Click [Congure Port].
2
Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].
3
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Congur
e Port].
2
Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
Setting Up
46
If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
If you selected [LPR], enter "lp
" in [Queue Name].
3
Click [OK].
4
Click [Close].
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 48)
Setting Up
47
Setting Up Print Server
1W2X-00X
With a print server, you can r
educe the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it
possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers
on each computer by using the provided DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure
the settings for sharing the printer.
T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
"Canon Driver Information Assist Service
" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.
4
Install additional drivers as necessary.
This oper
ation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
Setting Up
48
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
2
Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
Select additional drivers fr
om the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]
If you do not kno
w whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 735) .
3
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that
contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
If the print server runs a 32-bit oper
ating system, select [intdrv]
[UFRII] [uk_eng] [x64]
[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.
If the print server runs a 64-bit oper
ating system, select [intdrv]
[UFRII] [uk_eng] [32bit]
[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.
5
Click [OK].
Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1
Locate the shared printer in the print server.
Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P
. 733)
2
Double-click the shared printer.
Setting Up
49
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 256)
Setting Up
50
Conguring the Machine for Y
our Network
Environment
1W2X-00Y
The congur
ation of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 52)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 54)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
Conguring DNS(P
. 56)
Conguring SMB
(P. 60)
Conguring WINS
(P. 62)
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 69)
Other Network Settings(P. 73)
Setting Up
51
Conguring Ethernet Settings
1W2X-010
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can
set the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In gener
al, the machine can be
used without changing the defaults (
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 461) ), but
you can change these settings to suit your network envir
onment.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences>
<Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
4
Select whether to congur
e Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode
and the type that can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1
Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.
2
<Communication Mode>
select the communication mode.
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and r
eceives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
Setting Up
52
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and r
eceives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3
<Ethernet Type>
select the Ethernet type.
4
Select <Apply>.
5
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 54)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
Setting Up
53
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
1W2X-011
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a pack
et that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
4
Select the MTU.
5
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 52)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
Setting Up
54
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
1W2X-012
When a network is designed to enjo
y redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences> <Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>.
4
Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and
select <Apply>.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 52)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 54)
Setting Up
55
Conguring DNS
1W2X-013
DNS (Domain Name System) pr
ovides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Congure DNS settings.
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1
Select [IPv4 Settings]
[Edit].
2
Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
Setting Up
56
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire SMTP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Addr
ess]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
Setting Up
57
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted b
y Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1
Select [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].
2
Congure IPv6 DNS settings.
The [Use IPv6] check bo
x must be selected to congure the settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Addr
ess]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Setting Up
58
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"
example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted b
y Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen. <DNS Settings>(P. 456)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
Setting Up
59
Conguring SMB
1W2X-014
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and
printers, with mor
e than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store
scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have
to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.
NetBIOS Name
In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected
computers as well as for le sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as
the NetBIOS name.
W
orkgroup Name
Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as le
sharing, become available in a Windo
ws network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the
machine belongs to.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
Setting Up
60
[NetBIOS Name]
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
NetBIOS names or workgr
oup names that start with an asterisk (
*
) cannot be registered to a WINS server.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Conguring WINS(P. 62)
Setting Up
61
Conguring WINS
1W2X-015
Windo
ws Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.
In or
der to specify WINS server settings, NetBIOS name and workgroup name are required to be set.
Conguring SMB
(P. 60)
The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [WINS Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check bo
x to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
Setting Up
62
If
the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
WINS settings can also be accessed fr
om <Menu> in the Home screen.
<WINS Settings>(P. 457)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Setting Up
63
Registering LDAP Servers
1W2X-016
If an LDAP server is implemented in the network, you can search the server for fax
numbers or e-mail addr
esses, and then specify them as destinations or register
them in the Address Book. Note also that if send function authentication (
LDAP
Server Authentication
(P. 361) ) is enabled, you must register the server used for
authentication. You can register a maximum of ve LDAP servers each for searching
and for authentication to the machine. Register LDAP servers via the Remote UI.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Click [LDAP Server Settings].
4
Click [Register New Server] for [LDAP Server (For Search)] or [LDAP Server (For
Authentication)].
LD
AP server registration needs to be performed separately either for searching or for authentication. To use
an LDAP server for searching for fax and e-mail destinations, register it for searching, and to use it for
authenticating sending of e-mail or faxes, register it for authenticating.
To edit registered server information
Click a te
xt link under [Server Name] for the edit screen.
To delete registered server information
Click [Delete] on the right of the server name you want to delete
click [OK].
5
Register the LDAP server.
Register the server used for searches
Register the server for sear
ching for fax or e-mail destinations.
Setting Up
64
[Server Name]
Enter the name to be assigned to the LD
AP server.
[Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server
(example: ldap.example.com).
[Server Address] and DNS
To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the
following:
- If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.
- If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward
lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Do Not Use] or [Use] for [Login Information]. If
you select [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.
[Position to Start Search]
Specify the node in the dir
ectory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box
blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
When specifying the node, enter "DC=," followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the
Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is
"john.example.com," for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."
[Use TLS]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
This
is enabled only when [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login
Information].
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.
[Search Timeout]
Setting Up
65
Specify how long the machine searches.
[Login Information]
Select [Do Not Use], [Use], or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication
implemented b
y the LDAP server. When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, the user name and
password must be specied.
[Do Not Use] Select not to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use (Security Authentication)]
Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the
authentication passwor
d. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be
synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
[Display Authentication Screen When Searching]
Select the check bo
x to require the user to enter the user name and password when a search is requested. If the
[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] check box is selected, the user name
and password used for authentication when sending faxes or scans are also used here. If the check box is
cleared, authentication is carried out using the information entered in [User Name] and [Password].
[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started]
Set whether the authentication information when the fax or scan function was used is also used when
searching. This check box is normally displayed selected; however, it is only valid when the [Display
Authentication Screen When Searching] check box is selected.
[User Name]
Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server.
When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form "(domain name)\(user
name)" (example: domain1\user1).
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, enter the user name only (example: user1).
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password]
text box.
[Domain Name]
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the
directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
[Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access]
Select the check box to verify the certicate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
Also, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] check box as necessary.
Registering the authentication server
If the use of the fax and scan functions is restricted, register the server used for authentication.
Setting Up
66
[Server Name]
Enter the name to be assigned to the LD
AP server.
[Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server
(example: ldap.example.com).
[Server Address] and DNS
To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the
following:
- If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.
- If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward
lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use
(Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.
[Position to Start Search]
Specify the node in the dir
ectory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box
blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
When specifying the node, enter "DC=," followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the
Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is
"john.example.com," for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."
[Use TLS]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
This is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information].
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used for communicating with the LD
AP server.
[Authentication/Attribute Acquisition Timeout]
Specify how long authentication and attribute acquisition can continue.
Setting Up
67
[User Name Attribute]
Enter the attribute name, to be compar
ed with a user name entered during authentication, consisting of
alphanumeric characters (Example: "sAMAccountName").
Not r
equired if [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].
[E-Mail Address Attribute]
Enter the attribute name, to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, consisting
of alphanumeric characters (Example: "mail").
[Login Information]
Select [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the
LDAP server.
[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the System Manager ID.
[Use (Security Authentication)]
Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the
authentication passwor
d. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be
synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
[Use System Manager ID]
If [Use] is selected in [Login Information], this species whether authentication using the system manager ID is
used. T
o use the system manager ID, select the check box and specify the user name and password used for
authentication. If you deselect the check box, logins are anonymous (no user name).
[User Name]
Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server in the form "(domain name)\(user
name)" (example: domain1\user1).
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password]
text box.
[Domain Name]
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the
directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
[Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access]
Select the check box to verify the certicate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
Also, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] check box as necessary.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Conguring SNTP(P. 73)
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
LDAP Server Authentication(P. 361)
Setting Up
68
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
1W2X-017
Simple Network Management Pr
otocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is e
xposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI befor
e conguring SNMPv3 (
Conguring the Ke
y and
Certicate for TLS(P. 377) ).
The machine does not support the tr
ap notication feature of SNMP.
To change the port number of SNMP, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374) .
SNMP management softwar
e, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
Setting Up
69
5
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, pr
oceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check bo
x to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a pr
eset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access
Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, pr
oceed to the next step.
Setting Up
70
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check bo
x to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desir
ed combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security
Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate
encryption algorithm for your network environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password
in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
7
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
Setting Up
71
With SNMP
, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check bo
x to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8
Click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Disabling SNMPv1
If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the oper
ation panel
You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>.
<SNMP Settings>(P. 459)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
If both versions of SNMP ar
e enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Setting Up
72
Other Network Settings
1W2X-018
Congur
e the following items according to your network environment.
Conguring FTP P
ASV Mode(P. 73)
Conguring SNTP
(P. 73)
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 74)
Conguring FTP PASV Mode
PASV is an FTP communication mode used for le transfer. To connect to an FTP server through a rewall, you must
use PASV mode. First check that the PASV mode is set on the FTP server.
Whether P
ASV mode is used for FTP depends on your network environment and the settings on the FTP
server to which data is being sent. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use FTP PASV Mode> <On>
Restart the machine
Conguring SNTP
Simple Network Time Pr
otocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.
If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be
maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before
conguring SNTP (
Setting the Date/Time(P. 12) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [SNTP Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
Setting Up
73
5
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check bo
x to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
Y
ou can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network
Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is
displayed as sho
wn below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems
Y
ou can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as iW Management Console
*
, into the network. Information such as device
settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a
network, iW Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location
Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status information. SLP settings can be
Setting Up
74
specied via the Remote UI. This section also describes the pr
ocedure to congure settings for communication
between the machine and plug-ins for iW Management Console.
*
For more information about iW Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
To use iW Management Console plug-ins
Y
ou need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set
[MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.
<Use Dedicated Port>(P. 460)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 69)
Remote UI Oper
ations
For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
Conguring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Specify SLP settings.
Specifying multicast device discovery
1
Select [Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].
2
Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check bo
x to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software.
Setting Up
75
T
o change the port number for multicast discovery, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374) .
[Scope Name]
T
o include the machine into a specic scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.
3
Click [OK].
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1
Select [Sleep Mode Notication Settings]
[Edit].
2
Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
[Notify]
Select the check bo
x to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass through.
[Notication Interval]
Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status.
3
Click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Conguring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins
You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and iW Management Console plug-ins.
Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine's settings from iW Management Console.
Setting Up
76
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Device Settings Management> <On>
Setting Up
77
Installing Drivers
1W2X-019
Install the various drivers and associated softwar
e on your computer.
1
Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.
Install the optional de
vices on the main unit in advance.
Optional Equipment(P. 722)
If the machine is supplied with a D
VD-ROM, insert the DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/).
When
new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.
You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.
Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.
Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported
status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.
2
Proceed with the installation.
For mor
e information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are
going to use.
Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall
Settings]. For more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 368) .
If sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by
[Firewall Settings], it is no longer possible to perform printing or send faxes from that computer.
Setting Up
78
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
1W2X-01A
Follo
w steps 1 to 4 described below to congure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your
intended use, and then follow the on-screen instructions to congure the settings. For more information about a
particular step, click on the link to go to the corresponding section.
Step 1
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use(P. 80)
Step 2
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81)
Step 3
Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 82)
Step 4
Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
Setting Up
79
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use
1W2X-01C
Befor
e conguring the fax settings, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use.
Intended use Receive mode
Use fax only/Never use telephone <Auto>
This setting is for when you want to use the machine e
xclusively for receiving faxes,
and you do not want to use the telephone or optional handset.
Mostly use telephone/Almost never use fax
<Manual>
Connect your telephone or handset to the machine. This setting is for when you
mostly want to use the telephone. Y
ou can receive incoming faxes manually.
Use both fax and telephone
Use answering machine <Answering Machine>
Connect your answering machine. Callers can
r
ecord a message if they call while you are away
from the telephone. The machine automatically
receives incoming faxes.
Use standard telephone or
handset
<Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
Connect your telephone or handset. The machine
automatically receives incoming faxes, and the
telephone rings for incoming calls.
Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or r
eceive faxes
properly.
You may be able to manually set receive modes other than those described above, depending on your
country or region.
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
»
Continue to Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Setting Up
80
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
1W2X-01E
Register the fax number and unit name of your machine. This information is printed at the top of each page sent fr
om
the machine.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Fax Setup Guide>.
3
Select <Set Up Now>.
4
Select <Next>.
5
Enter the fax number, and select <Apply>.
6
Select <Next>.
7
Enter the unit name (such as a user name or company name), and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
When the unit name has been r
egistered, the RX mode setting screen is displayed.
»
Continue to
Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 82)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Setting Up
81
Selecting the Receive Mode
1W2X-01F
Select the r
eceive mode that suits your intended use beforehand (
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to
Use(P
. 80) ).
1
Select <Next>.
2
Select the receive mode.
Select <Y
es> or <No> to select the receive mode for the operations you intend to carry out.
Y
ou may be able to manually set receive modes other than those described below, depending on your
country or region.
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
To set the receive mode to <Auto>
Select <No>.
To set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>
Select <Y
es>
<Yes>.
To set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
Select <Y
es>
<No> <Yes>.
To set the receive mode to <Manual>
Select <Yes> <No> <No>.
3
Select <Apply>.
When the RX mode has been set, the telephone line connection method is displayed.
»
Continue to Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Setting Up
82
Connecting the Telephone Line
1W2X-01H
Connect the telephone line to the machine.
1
Connect the telephone line to the machine.
Connect the included telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine (
) and the telephone line
jack on the wall.
If you ar
e using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack (
).
If you ar
e using an optional handset, connect it to the handset jack (
).
If
you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes
manually.
2
Select <End> after the telephone line has been connected.
3
Select <Yes>.
If the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line
Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you
are using, contact your local telephone company. <Select Line Type> may not be available depending on the
country where you are using the machine.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Set Line> <Select Line Type>
Select the type of telephone line
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Setting Up
83
Conguring Scan Settings
1W2X-01J
T
o send scanned originals directly by e-mail or I-Fax or save them to shared folders or FTP server, you need to
congure the network. The Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you
with the required setup. Set the necessary conguration depending on your purpose and network environment.
Saving to a Computer
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85)
Scanning to E-mail or I-Fax
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)
Scanning to Shar
ed Folders
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)
Saving to FTP Server
Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)
LINKS
System Environment(P. 718)
Scan Function(P. 712)
Setting Up
84
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
1W2X-01K
T
o use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a
computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. In Windows,
when connecting this machine to a computer via a wireless or wired LAN, you need to register this machine in "MF
Network Scanner Selector" using the following procedure. This procedure is not required if the machine and your
computer are connected via USB.
The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer ar
e connected in an IPv6 environment.
Use IPv4 or a USB connection.
1
Click
in the system tray.
2
Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].
Setting Up
85
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive
I-Fax
1W2X-01L
Befor
e conguring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup ow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP addr
ess of the machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
An e-mail addr
ess to be registered as a destination.
Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port
numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password
for authentication.
For mor
e information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet
service provider or Network Administrator.
Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send
Function Setting T
ool (sending e-mail).
System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool
System
Envir
onment(P. 718)
Also mak
e sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 412)
Set the machine congur
ation.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings
(P. 87)
Conguring I-Fax Receiving Settings
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax
Communication Settings
(P. 90)
Conguring Detailed E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings (Authentication,
Encryption, etc.)
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
Setting Up
86
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings
1W2X-01R
This section describes ho
w to congure the e-mail settings by using the Send Function Setting Tool. With the Send
Function Setting Tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the Address Book.
The Send Function Setting T
ool helps you congure the basic settings for sending e-mails. Instead of the
Send Function Setting Tool, you can use the Remote UI to congure more detailed settings such as the
settings for POP authentication before sending or for encrypted communication.
Conguring E-Mail/I-
Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
1
Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://<the IP addr
ess of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the DVD-ROM
1
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you ar
e prompted to do so.
2
Click [Start Software Programs].
If the [Softwar
e Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see
Displaying the [Software
Pr
ograms/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 734) .
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3
Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4
Click [Next].
If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].
If the scr
een that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].
5
Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
Setting Up
87
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
Click [Sear
ch Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the
machine, and then click [OK].
6
Conrm the settings and click [OK].
2
Click [Start].
If the login scr
een is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then
click [Logon].
3
Click [Send to E-mail Settings].
If the scr
een prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,
and click [OK].
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
4
Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
[Favorites Number]
Setting Up
88
With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <Favorites> in the Address
Book. Select a number fr
om the drop-down list.
[Name for Favorites Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in the Address Book.
[Send Destination Settings]
[Destination E-mail Addr
ess]
Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned originals to.
[SMTP Server Settings]
[SMTP Server]
Enter the SMTP server name.
[SMTP Authentication]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] r
adio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When
[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text
box.
Authentication methods for sending e-mails
T
o prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP
AUTH) and POP before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact
your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
POP before SMTP authentication can only be congured by using the Remote UI.
Conguring
E-Mail/I-
Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)
5
Click [Next].
6
Conrm the settings and click [Register].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact
your Internet service pr
ovider or Network Administrator.
To enable TLS for e-mailing, see
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90) .
To change port numbers, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374) .
LINKS
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)
Specifying E-Mail Settings(P. 313)
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Setting Up
89
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
1W2X-01S
Use the Remote UI to congur
e the detailed send and receive settings, such as the settings for using the machine to
send and receive I-Faxes and the settings for POP authentication and encryption of communication before you send e-
mail or I-Faxes. Contact your provider or network administrator for the required settings.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [TX Settings] [Network Settings - E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[SMTP Server]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.
[POP Server]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name or IP address for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specied e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select the check box and enter alphanumeric
characters in [Password].
Setting Up
90
Specify the settings required for I-Fax reception
[POP RX]
Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.
[POP Interval]
This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax
documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.
To disable automatic reception
Set [POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you r
eceive I-Faxes manually.
Receiving I-Faxes
Manually(P
. 253)
Conguring Pop Authentication befor
e Sending
POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail and I-Faxes by performing
user authentication on the POP3 server.
[Use POP Authentication Before Sending]
T
o use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail or I-Faxes, select the check box.
[Use APOP Authentication]
Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.
Conguring SMTP authentication
If you congur
e SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identication by user name and password is
performed at the time of sending e-mail or I-Fax.
Setting Up
91
[Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)]
T
o enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the
[User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.
Conguring encrypted communication
Y
ou can congure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server.
[Use TLS for SMTP]
Select the check bo
x to use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for
[Verify Certicate] or [Add CN to Verication Items] depending on your needs.
[Use TLS for POP]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certicate]
and [Add CN to Verication Items] check boxes as required.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Setting Up
92
Depending on the network you ar
e using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting (
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374) ). For mor
e information, contact your Internet service provider or Network
Administrator.
LINKS
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P
. 87)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 245)
Setting Up
93
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save
Location
1W2X-01U
Befor
e conguring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup ow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP addr
ess of the machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
The name of the computer wher
e the shared folder is located.
Checking the
Computer Name(P
. 736)
Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the
folder, the user name and password information is also needed).
For instructions on ho
w to create a new shared folder, see "Send Setting Guide."
Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send
Function Setting T
ool.
System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool
System
Envir
onment(P. 718)
Also mak
e sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 412)
Set the machine congur
ation.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save
Location
(P. 95)
Setting Up
94
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
1W2X-01W
The featur
e of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block
(SMB), a Windows-specic technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more
than one device in a network (
Conguring SMB
(P. 60) ). To congure the machine for saving your scanned
documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder from a computer in
advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function Setting Tool.
Y
ou can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering
the folder to the Address Book. Registering Destinations in the Address Book from Remote UI.
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
1
Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://<the IP addr
ess of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the DVD-ROM
1
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you ar
e prompted to do so.
2
Click [Start Software Programs].
If the [Softwar
e Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see
Displaying the [Software
Pr
ograms/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 734) .
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3
Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4
Click [Next].
If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].
If the scr
een that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].
5
Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
Setting Up
95
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
Click [Sear
ch Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the
machine, and then click [OK].
6
Conrm the settings and click [OK].
2
Click [Start].
If the login scr
een is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then
click [Logon].
3
Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].
If the scr
een prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,
and click [OK].
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
4
Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
Setting Up
96
[Favorites Number]
With the Send Function Setting T
ool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents
into <Favorites> in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.
[Name for Favorites Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in the Address Book.
[Store Destination Settings]
[Pr
otocol]
The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.
[Computer Name of Store Destination]
Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.
[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]
Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named
"share" and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter
"users\public\share."
[Status of Settings for Shared Folder]
[Access Restriction to Shar
ed Folder]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When
[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the
[Password to Access] text box.
5
Click [Next].
6
Conrm the settings and click [Register].
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Setting Up
97
Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location
1W2X-01X
Befor
e conguring the machine for scanning to FTP Server, check the setup ow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP addr
ess of the machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
FTP server name.
Path to the FTP server and folder name.
User name, passwor
d (only if set).
If the path, folder name, user name, passwor
d, etc. for the FTP server are
unknown, contact you Network Administrator.
To change the FTP port number.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374)
Check whether you need to use PASV mode.
If a r
ewall is installed between the machine and the FTP server, you must set
PASV mode.
Conguring FTP P
ASV Mode(P. 73)
Also mak
e sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 412)
Register the FTP server address.
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Setting Up
98
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................
101
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................. 104
Front Side ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
Insert a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................................. 107
Back Side ...................................................................................................................................................... 109
Interior ......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 111
Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................................................................................... 112
Paper Drawer ............................................................................................................................................... 113
Operation Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 115
Turning ON the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 117
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 118
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ................................................................................................................ 119
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 121
Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 122
Home Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 123
<Status Monitor> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 126
Message Display .................................................................................................................................... 128
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 129
Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................ 132
Logging in to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 134
Placing Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 136
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 140
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 142
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 149
Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 157
Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 159
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................. 160
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 162
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................. 164
Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 166
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 167
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................... 168
Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 169
Basic Operations
99
Customizing the Home Screen .....................................................................................................................
170
Registering Frequently Used Settings ........................................................................................................... 173
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 175
Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 177
Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 179
Registering Destinations .................................................................................................................................. 181
Registering Destinations in the Address Book .............................................................................................. 183
Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ........................................................................................ 186
Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................... 188
Basic Operations
100
Basic Operations
1W2X-01Y
This chapter describes basic oper
ations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display.
Parts and Their Functions(P. 104)
T
urning ON the Machine
This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 117)
Using the Oper
ation Panel
This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes
how to enter characters and numbers.
Using the Operation Panel(P. 121)
Logging in to the Machine
This section describes ho
w to log in when a login screen is displayed.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
Basic Operations
101
Placing Originals
This section describes ho
w to place originals on the platen glass and in the feeder.
Placing Originals(P. 136)
Loading Paper
This section describes ho
w to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Customizing the Display
This section describes ho
w to rearrange buttons or create shortcut buttons in order to make it easier to use screens
shown in the display.
Customizing the Display(P. 169)
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
This section describes ho
w to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.
Changing the
Default Settings for Functions
(P. 175)
Basic Operations
102
Setting Sounds
This section describes ho
w to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when fax sending
is complete or when an error occurs.
Setting Sounds(P. 177)
Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes ho
w to set the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
Registering Destinations
This section describes ho
w to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents.
Registering
Destinations
(P. 181)
Basic Operations
103
Parts and Their Functions
1W2X-020
This section describes the parts of the machine (e
xterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 105)
Back Side(P. 109)
Interior(P. 110)
Feeder(P. 111)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 112)
Paper Drawer(P. 113)
Operation Panel(P. 115)
Basic Operations
104
Front Side
1W2X-021
Feeder / Platen glass cover
The feeder automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or mor
e sheets are loaded
in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously. The platen glass cover secures the originals placed on
the platen glass.
Feeder(P. 111)
USB port (for USB device connection)
Use this port to connect a thir
d-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory
device allows you to print data from the memory device or store scanned originals on the memory device.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 288)
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper when you want to pr
event paper from falling out of the output tray.
Speaker
Emits sounds pr
oduced by the machine, such as fax tones and warning tones.
Basic Operations
105
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 595)
Operation panel
The oper
ation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can
perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.
Operation Panel(P. 115)
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tr
ay.
Power switch
T
urns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Front cover
Open the fr
ont cover when replacing toner cartridges.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you fr
equently use into the paper drawer.
Loading Paper in the Paper
Dr
awer(P. 142)
Multi-purpose tray/Manual feed slot
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tr
ay when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer.
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
In
the User's Guide, "manual feed slot," if it does not need to be distinguished from "multi-purpose tray," is
collectively referred to as "multi-purpose tray."
Platen glass
When scanning books, originals of heavy or thin paper and other originals that cannot be scanned using the
feeder, place them on the platen glass. Placing Originals(P. 136)
Ventilation slots
Air inside the machine is vented out to cool do
wn the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in front
of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
Basic Operations
106
Insert a USB Memory Device
1W2X-022
Insert a USB memory into the USB port on the fr
ont side of the machine. You can directly print data from a USB
memory or directly save scanned originals on a USB memory.
Before using a USB memory device
The supported formats of USB memory de
vice are FAT16 and FAT32.
It is necessary to set <Use Scan Function> and <Use Print Function> to <On>.
<Memory Media
Settings>(P
. 562)
The following devices and uses are not supported:
USB memory devices that have security functions installed
USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards
Memory card readers connected via USB
USB memory devices that are used with extension cables
USB memory devices used via a USB hub
Handling of USB memory devices
Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in
incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.
Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.
Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.
You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.
Remo
ve the USB Memory Device
Always use the follo
wing procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove
USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Rmv. Mem. Media>.
W
ait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
3
Disconnect the USB memory device.
Basic Operations
107
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device(P. 284)
Basic Operations
108
Back Side
1W2X-023
Rear cover
Open the r
ear cover when clearing paper jams.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
Rating label
The label sho
ws the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.
When a
Pr
oblem Cannot Be Solved(P. 685)
Power socket
Connect the po
wer cord.
USB port (for USB device connection)
Use this port to connect de
vices such as a third-party USB keyboard.
USB port (for computer connection)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired
LAN(P
. 17)
Handset jack
Connect an optional handset.
External telephone jack
Connect your telephone or answering machine. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
Telephone line jack
Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line. Connecting the Telephone
Line
(P. 83)
Basic Operations
109
Interior
1W2X-024
Toner cartridge tray
Install the toner cartridges. Load the Y (yello
w), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the
slots from the rear to the front respectively.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Basic Operations
110
Feeder
1W2X-025
Feeder cover
Open when clearing paper jams. Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 675)
Slide guides
Adjust these guides to match the width of original.
Original supply tray
Automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or mor
e sheets of original are loaded
in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously.
Placing Originals(P. 136)
Original output tray
Scanned originals ar
e output here.
Document feed scanning area
Originals loaded in the feeder ar
e automatically fed to the scanning area to be scanned.
Do not place any objects in the original output ar
ea. Doing so may cause damage to the originals.
Regularly clean the feeder and platen glass in order to obtain proper print results.
Regular
Cleaning(P
. 580)
Basic Operations
111
Multi-Purpose Tray
1W2X-026
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to e
xactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
For MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Pr
ess the lock release lever that is indicated with an arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide
the paper guides.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tr
ay when loading paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Basic Operations
112
Paper Drawer
1W2X-027
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to e
xactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)
When loading Legal size paper, the paper dr
awer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock
and extend the length of the paper drawer.
When loading Legal size paper
When the e
xtended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.
Basic Operations
113
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142)
Basic Operations
114
Operation Panel
1W2X-028
The angle of the oper
ation panel can be adjusted. Adjust it to an angle that is most comfortable for
viewing the panel.
Adjusting the Angle(P. 116)
Display
Y
ou can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can
specify settings by touching the screen directly.
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Basic Operation(P. 129)
Sound Volume key
Pr
ess to adjust volume.
Setting Sounds(P. 177)
Energy Saver key
Pr
ess to put the machine into the sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in the sleep
mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
Data indicator
Blinks while an oper
ation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there
are documents waiting to be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an err
or such as a paper jam occurs.
Home key
Pr
ess to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and
scan.
Home Screen(P. 123)
Basic Operations
115
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 170)
Stop key
Pr
ess to cancel printing and other operations.
NFC (Near Field Communication) mark
Y
ou can also use functions such as printing by waving a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business installed
over this mark.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 322)
Adjusting the Angle
When it is dicult to vie
w the touch panel display, adjust the angle of the operation panel.
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 129)
Basic Operations
116
Turning ON the Machine
1W2X-029
This section describes ho
w to turn ON the machine.
1
Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into a po
wer outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
The Start scr
een appears.
Operation Panel(P. 115)
Y
ou can select the screen that is displayed rst after the machine is turned ON.
<Default Screen After
Startup/Restor
ation>(P. 441)
LINKS
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 118)
Basic Operations
117
Turning OFF the Machine
1W2X-02A
This section describes ho
w to turn OFF the machine.
1
Press the power switch.
It may tak
e some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.
You can specify the time for each day of the week and congure a setting to automatically turn OFF the
machine.
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 119)
Basic Operations
118
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
1W2X-02C
Y
ou can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specied time on each day of the week. This
allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this
function is disabled.
For information about the basic oper
ation to set up the machine from Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu
Options fr
om Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Timer Settings] [Edit].
4
Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn
OFF the po
wer.
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Selecting the check bo
x allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
Basic Operations
119
Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time eld blank means
that the auto shutdo
wn function is disabled for that day.
5
Click [OK].
If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specied time
*
When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
When the menu scr
een or Check Counter screen is displayed
When settings data is being imported/exported
When the rmware is being updated
*
If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals
of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.
Basic Operations
120
Using the Operation Panel
1W2X-02E
Y
ou can use the display and keys of the operation panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This
section describes basic usage of the display and keys.
Basic Screens(P. 122)
Basic Operation(P. 129)
Entering Text(P. 132)
If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display: <Invert Screen Colors>(P. 466)
If you want to adjust the brightness of the display: <Brightness>(P. 466)
LINKS
Operation Panel(P. 115)
Basic Operations
121
Basic Screens
1W2X-02F
The Home scr
een or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan.
You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status. The
screen is also a touch panel, so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.
Home Screen(P. 123)
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 126)
Message Display(P. 128)
Y
ou can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the
respective functions.
Customizing the Display(P. 169)
To Know How to Operate
On some scr
eens, the <?> button allows you to view the descriptions of functions or how to operate.
Basic Operations
122
Home Screen
1W2X-02H
The Home scr
een is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing
on the operation panel. Use this screen
to specify settings for and r
egister functions.
Change page
Use this to vie
w another page in the Home screen. You can also
ick sideways to change pages.
<Check Counter>
Displays the totals for black and white and color printouts
separ
ately.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 608)
<Log Out>
Use this button to log out fr
om the machine.
<Status Monitor>
Pr
ess to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or
to view the network settings such as the IP address of the
machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as
the remaining amount of paper and the amount remaining in
the toner cartridges, or whether any errors that occurred.
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 126)
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wir
eless LAN.
<Copy>
Use this button to start cop
ying.
Copying(P. 190)
<Fax>
Use this button to send a fax fr
om the machine.
Faxing(P. 212)
<Scan>
Scans an original and converts it into an electr
onic le. You can
save scanned les on your computer or send them via e-mail.
Scanning(P. 276)
<Memory Media Print>
Prints les stor
ed in a USB memory device.
Printing from a
USB Memory De
vice (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
Basic Operations
123
Application Libr
ary button
You can use these buttons to perform convenient functions by a
one-touch operation. For more information, see the manual for
Application Library on the online manual website.
<Secure Print>
Use this function to print a secur
e document.
Printing a
Document Secur
ed by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 263)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>, <Pr
eferences>, and many other machine
settings start from this button.
Setting Menu List(P. 439)
<Addr
ess Book>
Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and
faxes. You can also display a registered destination when
sending an e-mail or fax.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
<Paper Settings>
This button is used for specifying the size and type of paper
loaded in the paper dr
awer and multi-purpose tray.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
<Mobile Portal>
Use this to establish a connection to a mobile de
vice.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 322)
<Home Screen Settings>
Allo
ws you to change the order that Home screen buttons are
displayed in.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 170)
<Update Firmware>
Allo
ws you to update the rmware via the Internet.
Updating
the Firmwar
e(P. 434)
<ID Card Copy>
Use this function to cop
y the front and back sides of a driver's
license or other card onto the same side of one sheet of paper.
Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)
Basic Operations
124
<Operation Guide>
Pr
ess to view operation guidance and error causes/solutions.
Shortcut buttons
Display "Favorite Settings" that ar
e registered to Copy, Fax, and
Scan.
Adding Buttons to the Home Screen(P. 170)
LINKS
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 170)
Basic Operations
125
<Status Monitor> Screen
1W2X-02J
When you select <Status Monitor>, a scr
een appears in which you can check the progress of document processing as
well as the status of the machine (the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges, etc.) and network settings
such as the machine's IP address.
<Error Information/Notication>
Displays the details of any err
ors that occurred.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount of paper or the amount of toner r
emaining in the
toner cartridges.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper sour
ce.
<Cartridge Information>
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of
their lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Check Counter>
Displays the separate totals for black and white and color printouts.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 608)
<Secur
e Print Memory Usage>
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.
Printing a
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 263)
<Version Information>
Displays rmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Basic Operations
126
Status and logs of copied, printed, and sent/received documents
Displays the curr
ent status of the selected item. The <Copy/Print Job> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP addr
ess of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
<Rmv. Mem. Media>
Used to safely r
emove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is connected
to the machine.
Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 107)
Basic Operations
127
Message Display
1W2X-02K
Messages ar
e displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner
cartridge lifetime is reached.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
scr
een instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example.
Basic Operations
128
Basic Operation
1W2X-02L
The display is a touch panel, allo
wing you to operate directly on the screen.
Avoid the following actions.
The display may malfunction or be damaged.
-
Pressing forcefully
- Pressing with pointed objects (ngernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
- Operating with wet/soiled hands
- Operating the display while an object is placed on it
Befor
e using the touch panel display, peel off the protective lm from the display.
Tap
Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or nalizing items.
Flick
Flick with the nger on the display
. The effect of icking varies depending on the screen. For instance, icking in
the Home screen moves you one page in the direction of the ick.
Selecting Items
T
ap an item name or button to make a selection.
Basic Operations
129
If an item is mistakenly touched
Slide your nger away then r
elease it from the screen to cancel the selection.
To return to the previous screen
T
ap
to return to the previous screen.
Scr
olling the Screen
The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed,
ick the screen to scroll in the direction of the ick. Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being
touched.
Changing the Setting V
alue
Tap <+>/<-> to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by icking the slider left or right.
Basic Operations
130
Y
ou can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:
<Display
Settings>(P
. 441)
You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied
length of time:
<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 448)
Y
ou can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness:
<Accessibility>(P. 466)
Basic Operations
131
Entering Text
1W2X-02R
When entering te
xt or a number, use the keyboard displayed on the screen. The numeric keys are displayed on the
screen to enter only numbers.
Switching the Type of Character
Tap <a> or <1/#> to switch the type of character that is entered.
T
o enter upper case characters, tap
.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is tapped. Holding down allows you to delete successive
char
acters.
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Tap or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap .
When the Numeric Ke
ys are Displayed
When you are supposed to enter only a numeric value, the numeric keys are displayed on the screen. Tap
numeric keys to enter the numeric value.
Value range
The values in ( ) displayed the entry bo
x are the enterable value range.
Basic Operations
132
When buttons other than the numeric keys are displayed
When <+>/<-> or
/ are displayed, you can tap the buttons to increase or decrease the numeric
value or mo
ve the cursor.
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard
Y
ou can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the
Front Side(P. 105) or Back Side(P. 109) and
enter te
xt from the keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.
Some k
eys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When
keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.
To delete text, press the [Delete] key.
Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.
You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout).
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 445)
Y
ou can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to
disconnect it.
Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.
The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.
Basic Operations
133
Logging in to the Machine
1W2X-02S
If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs ar
e enabled, you must log in before using the
machine. You also need to log in if use of the fax and scan functions is restricted.
Department ID Management Login(P. 134)
Logging in to Authorized Send(P. 134)
Department ID Management Login
When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.
When <Insert the car
d.> is displayed, see
Copy Card Reader-F(P. 722) .
1
Enter the ID.
1
Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.
2
Enter the ID.
If no PIN is r
egistered, proceed to step 3.
2
Enter the PIN.
1
Select <PIN>.
2
Enter the PIN.
3
Select <Log In>.
The login scr
een will be changed to the Home screen.
After you nish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.
Logging in to Authorized Send
If the Send function authorization setting (
LDAP Server Authentication(P. 361) ) is enabled, the Authorized Send
login scr
een appears when the fax or scan function is used.
Basic Operations
134
1
Enter your user name.
1
Select <User Name>.
2
Enter your user name.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
2
Enter the password.
1
Select <Password>.
2
Enter the password.
3
Select <Server Name>, and select the server for your authentication.
Select the LD
AP server where your user name and password are registered.
4
Select <Log In>.
The login scr
een switches to the fax or scan function Home screen.
After you nish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.
If the <Select Logout Type> screen appears
If
you are logged in to both Authorized Send and Department ID Management, a dialog box appears in
which you can select the items you want to log out of. In the case where you want to log out of Authorized
Send (fax or scan function) while remaining logged in to Department ID Management, select <Log Out
from Authenticated Sending>. In any other cases, select <Log Out from All Authenticated Functions>.
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
Basic Operations
135
Placing Originals
1W2X-02U
Place originals on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents
such as books. Y
ou can load two or more sheets of originals in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously.
For information on loadable sizes, etc., see
Main Unit(P. 700) or Feeder(P. 704) .
Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 137)
Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 137)
Use originals that are completely dry
When placing originals, mak
e sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the originals has completely
dried.
To avoid paper jams
Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:
- Wrinkled or creased paper
-
Carbon paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Coated paper
- Torn paper
- Onion skin or thin paper
- Stapled or clipped originals
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Transparencies
To scan originals more accurately
Originals placed in the feeder ar
e scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, originals
placed on the platen glass remain in a xed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate
scanning results, placing originals on the platen glass is recommended.
To scan tracing paper or transparencies
To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.
Basic Operations
136
Placing Originals on the Platen Glass
1
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.
2
Place the original face down on the platen glass.
Align the corner of the original with the top-left corner of the platen glass.
T
o scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white
paper.
3
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
The machine is r
eady to scan the document.
When scanning is complete
Remo
ve the original from the platen glass.
Placing Originals in the Feeder
1
Open the original supply tray.
Basic Operations
137
2
Spread the slide guides apart.
Slide the slide guides outwar
d until they are slightly farther apart than the actual original width.
3
Fan the original stack and align the edges.
Fan the original stack in small batches, and align the edges b
y lightly tapping the stack on a at surface a few
times.
4
Place the original(s) face up in the feeder.
Mak
e sure that the original stack does not exceed the load limit line (
).
Do not load originals of various sizes at the same time.
If originals ar
e loaded so that they exceed the load limit line, scanning may stop or a paper jam may occur.
5
Align the slide guides against the edges of the original.
Slide the slide guides inwar
d until they are aligned securely against the edges of the original.
The machine is r
eady to scan the original.
Basic Operations
138
Align the slide guides securely against the edges of the original
Slide guides that ar
e too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.
While originals are being scanned
Do not add or remove originals.
When scanning is complete
Remove the scanned originals from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.
Basic Operations
139
Loading Paper
1W2X-02W
Y
ou can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See
Available Paper(P. 705) for
available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 140)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 141)
Ho
w to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Loading Envelopes(P. 154)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 157)
Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
A paper jam or printing err
or may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
Basic Operations
140
Paper handling and storage
It is r
ecommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.
Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
Steam may emit fr
om the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, tak
e the following precautions.
How to Store the Printed Paper
Store on a at surface.
Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
Precautions When Applying Adhesive
Always use insoluble adhesive.
Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 166)
Basic Operations
141
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
1W2X-02X
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper dr
awer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 142)
Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145)
When using A5 size paper, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145) and load it in the landscape
orientation. When loading paper in the portr
ait orientation, follow the steps shown in
Loading Regular
Size Paper
(P. 142) .
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
Follo
w the procedure below when loading paper into the optional cassette feeding module.
Loading Regular Size Paper
T
o load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For
paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see
Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 145) .
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Basic Operations
142
2
Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
While
pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate
paper size marking.
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
1
Slide the paper guide located on the side, and align the projection to the appropriate paper size marking.
2
While pressing the lock release lever, move the front side paper guide to align the projection to the
appropriate paper size marking.
Basic Operations
143
When loading Legal size paper
Pr
ess the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide
on the front side of the paper drawer.
Load the paper with the print side face up.
Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
Mak
e sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
Basic Operations
144
When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 157) .
4
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
When you insert the paper dr
awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
When loading Legal size paper
When the e
xtended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 160)
When changing the paper size or type
The
factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 1>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
Y
ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer or multi-purpose tray (
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) ), with the side to
print face up (pr
eviously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 470)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
Loading Custom Size Paper
T
o load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use
the following procedure.
Basic Operations
145
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Spread the paper guides apart.
Pr
ess the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward. On the MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn,
there is no lock release lever for the side paper guides.
When loading longer paper than A4 size
Pr
ess the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of
the paper dr
awer.
Basic Operations
146
Load the paper with the print side face up.
Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
Mak
e sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 157) .
4
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that ar
e too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
Basic Operations
147
When you insert the paper dr
awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
When loading longer paper than A4 size
When the e
xtended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 160)
When changing the paper size or type
The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 1>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
Y
ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer or multi-purpose tray (
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) ), with the side to
print face up (pr
eviously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 470)
-
If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 705)
Basic Operations
148
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
1W2X-02Y
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper dr
awer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142)
For the MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw(P. 149)
For the MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn(P. 151)
For the MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
The machine only prints when the paper dr
awer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose
tray. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
When loading A5 size paper
When setting the paper size, mak
e sure the current paper orientation.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in
the Multi-Purpose T
ray(P. 162)
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
1
Open the cover.
Hold the both sides of the co
ver to open it.
2
Pull out the paper tray.
Basic Operations
149
3
Spread the paper guides apart.
Pr
ess the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
4
Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
Load the paper with the print side face up.
Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
Mak
e sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
Basic Operations
150
When
loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Loading Envelopes(P. 154) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P
. 157) .
5
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
Slide the paper guides inwar
d until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 162)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
Y
ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer (
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142) ) or multi-purpose tr
ay, with the side to print
face up (previously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 470)
-
If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
For the MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
The machine only prints when the paper dr
awer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot.
An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
Load only one sheet of paper at a time
Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.
Basic Operations
151
When loading A5 size paper
When setting the paper size, mak
e sure the current paper orientation.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in
the Multi-Purpose T
ray(P. 162)
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
1
Spread the paper guides apart.
Slide the paper guides outwar
d.
2
Insert the paper and align the paper guides against the width of the paper.
Load the paper with the print side face up.
Insert the paper 10 to 20 mm into the manual feed slot, and then slide the paper guides inwar
d until they are
aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that ar
e too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
3
Insert the paper slowly into the manual feed slot until it reaches the back of the slot.
The paper is pulled slightly into the machine after it r
eaches the back of the slot.
Basic Operations
152
T
o ensure that the paper is loaded squarely, hold it with both hands until the pull-in operation is complete.
When
loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Loading Envelopes(P. 154) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P
. 157) .
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 162)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
Y
ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer (
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142) ) or manual feed slot, with the side to print
face up (pr
eviously printed side face down).
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 470)
-
If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 705)
Basic Operations
153
Loading Envelopes
1W2X-030
Mak
e sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 154)
In the Paper Drawer(P. 155)
In the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 155)
This section describes ho
w to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142) or
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follo
w the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
On the MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn, only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot.
Follo
w steps 1 to 3 in the procedure below to prepare the envelope for loading.
1
Close the ap of each envelope.
2
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly
.
3
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
Basic Operations
154
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.
In the Paper Drawer
Load the envelopes Monar
ch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side), with
the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is to
ward the left side as shown in the illustration.
In the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes Monar
ch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),
with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is to
ward the left side as shown in the illustration.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Basic Operations
155
Basic Operations
156
Loading Preprinted Paper
1W2X-031
When you use paper that has been pr
eprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 157)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 157)
This section mainly describes ho
w to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142) or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149) .
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portr
ait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the fr
ont logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Basic Operations
157
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting
When you print on pr
eprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,
the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be
used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided
printing.
<Switch Paper Feed Method>(P. 486)
Basic Operations
158
Specifying Paper Size and Type
1W2X-032
Y
ou must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 160)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 162)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 164)
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 166)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 167)
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 168)
If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing err
or may occur.
Basic Operations
159
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
1W2X-033
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select the target paper drawer.
is displayed only when the optional cassette feeding module is installed.
3
Select the paper size in the <Frequently Used Sizes> tab.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select the <Other Sizes> tab.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric k
eys.
If you r
egister the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch.
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 166)
3
Select <Apply>.
When loading A5 size paper
Basic Operations
160
In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portr
ait orientation, select <A5R>.
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
4
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 167)
Available Paper(P. 705)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
Basic Operations
161
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
T
ray
1W2X-034
The scr
een shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions
to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded
If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tr
ay, you can skip the paper setting operations by
registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,
the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 164) ).
1
Select the paper size in the <Frequently Used Sizes> tab.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select the <Other Sizes> tab.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric k
eys.
If you r
egister the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch.
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 166)
Basic Operations
162
3
Select <Apply>.
When loading A5 size paper
In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.
Example for MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
2
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 167)
Available Paper(P. 705)
Basic Operations
163
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-
Purpose T
ray
1W2X-035
Y
ou can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the
effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.
After the default paper setting is r
egistered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,
and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper
settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in
step 3, and then load the paper.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select multi-purpose tray.
3
Select the paper size in the <Frequently Used Sizes> tab.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select the <Other Sizes> tab.
Registering a custom paper size
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric k
eys.
Basic Operations
164
If you r
egister the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch.
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 166)
3
Select <Apply>.
When loading A5 size paper
In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portr
ait orientation, select <A5R>.
Example for MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
4
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 167)
Available Paper(P. 705)
Basic Operations
165
Registering a Custom Paper Size
1W2X-036
Y
ou can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Register Custom Paper>.
3
Select the registration number.
Deleting a setting
Select <Delete> <Yes>.
4
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric k
eys.
5
Select <Apply>.
Setting to the r
egistered custom size
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above can be called when <Custom> is selected on the
paper size selection scr
een for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 142)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 149)
Basic Operations
166
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
1W2X-037
Y
ou can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the <Frequently Used Sizes> tab of the screen for
selecting the paper size setting.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3
Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for.
4
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
Ensur
e that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
Paper
sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting the <Other Sizes> tab in the paper size setting
selection screen.
5
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 160)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 162)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 164)
Basic Operations
167
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source
for Each Function
1W2X-038
Enable or disable the automatic paper sour
ce selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the
machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also,
when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that
paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings>.
3
Select <Paper Source Auto Selection>.
4
Select the target function.
When the tar
get function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.
5
For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source
selection featur
e, select <On>.
<Dr
awer 2> is displayed only when the machine is equipped with the cassette feeding module (option).
Always
specify <On> for at least <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>. If you specify <Off> for the both, then you
cannot nish the setting procedure.
6
Select <Apply>.
Basic Operations
168
Customizing the Display
1W2X-039
In or
der to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it. In addition, you can work more eciently by
registering your favorite settings to the Basic Features screen for each function.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can rearrange buttons that are displayed in the Home screen. In addition, you can customize the Home
scr
een to make it easier to select functions by adding shortcut buttons.
Customizing the Home
Scr
een(P. 170)
Registering "Favorite Settings"
To make it possible to quickly call up the same settings for Copy, Fax, and Scan, you can register them as your
favorite settings. Y
ou can add registered setting combinations to the Home screen as shortcut buttons.
Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 173)
Basic Operations
169
Customizing the Home Screen
1W2X-03A
Y
ou can add/delete shortcut buttons displayed in the Home screen according to your application or a preferred
arrangement. You can also change the order that they are displayed in.
Adding Buttons to the Home Screen(P. 170)
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons(P. 171)
Adding Buttons to the Home Screen
You can add shortcut buttons to the Home screen for frequently used functions such as <Copy>, <Fax>, and <Scan>.
For example, you can carry out tasks more quickly and eciently by assigning a sequence of settings (e.g. "Scan both
sides of an original, save it as a highly compressed PDF le and send it via e-mail") to a single button.
The settings to be added as a shortcut button must be r
egistered beforehand as Favorite Settings.
Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 173)
1
Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
2
Select <Select Button to Display>.
3
Select the function with the Favorite Settings you want to add as a button.
4
Select the check box for all settings to be displayed in the Home screen and select
<Apply>.
Removing registered buttons
Basic Operations
170
Clear
the check box for the name of the button you want to remove and then select <Apply>. Once you
remove a registered button, a space appears where the button was displayed in the Home screen. If
necessary, delete the space.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
A button for the ne
wly selected settings is added to the Home screen.
If
the Home screen is full and no more settings can be registered, delete registered buttons and spaces
in <Home Screen Settings>.
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons
T
o make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. For instance, you can put the most
frequently used functions rst, or arrange the function buttons together with shortcut buttons for Favorite Settings.
You can also insert a blank (space) instead of a button to make it easier to view the Home screen.
1
Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
2
Select <Set Display Order>.
3
Select the button to move.
The selected button is highlighted. T
ap the selected button again to deselect it.
4
Select <Move Left> or <Move Right>.
The button mo
ves as many times as you tapped.
A long touch on <Move Left> or <Move Right> moves the selected button continuously.
Inserting a blank
When <Insert Blank> is selected, a blank is inserted on the left side of the selected button.
If the button at the end is selected, a blank is inserted e
ven if <Move Right> is selected.
Deleting a blank
Select the blank to be deleted, and select <Del. Blank>.
Basic Operations
171
5
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 129)
Basic Operations
172
Registering Frequently Used Settings
1W2X-03C
If you r
egister your frequently used settings as "favorite settings," you can quickly call up the same settings every time
you make copies, send a fax, or scan. In addition, if you register complicated settings as "favorite settings," you can
quickly call them up for ease of operation. You can also assign registered setting combinations to a shortcut button
displayed in the Home screen. This section describes how to register frequently used settings and how to call them up
when making a copy.
Registering Settings(P. 173)
Recalling Registered Settings(P. 174)
Y
ou can also register a fax or scan destination in the frequently used settings, however, it cannot be
changed once it is registered. To change a registered destination, delete the settings and then register them
again.
Registering Settings
1
Select <Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Change the values for the settings you want to register.
Basic Copy
Oper
ations(P. 194)
3
Select <Other Settings>
<Favorite Settings>.
4
Select unregistered settings, and select <Register>.
T
o change the content of a registered setting, select that setting and select <Edit>.
5
Check the details of the settings to be registered, and select <Register>.
T
o change the value of a setting to be registered, select the setting.
To rename the setting, select <Name>. On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
Basic Operations
173
6
Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.
If you select <Y
es>, a message appears. Check the message and then select <OK>. The registered setting
combination is added to the Home screen as a shortcut button.
If
the Home screen is full and the shortcut button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete
registered buttons or blanks.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 170)
Register
ed settings are retained even when the machine is turned OFF.
If you want to delete a registered setting, select <Copy>
<Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> select
the settings, and select <Delete> <Yes>.
Recalling Registered Settings
Simply select the setting combination that suits your purpose fr
om the favorite settings.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled,
and select <Apply>
Once you have r
ecalled the setting combination, you can also change the copy settings as needed.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Basic Operations
174
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
1W2X-03E
The default settings ar
e the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you select
<Reset>. If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate
the need to specify the same settings every time you perform an action.
Copy
For information about changeable setting items, see
<Change Default Settings (Copy)>(P. 490) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Copy> <Change Default Settings (Copy)> Select the setting
Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
F
AX
For information about changeable setting items, see
<Fax Settings>(P. 542) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Change Default Settings (Fax)>
Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
Memory Media Print
For information about changeable setting items, see <Access Stored Files Settings>(P. 556) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change
the default value of the selected item <Apply>
USB Memory
For information about changeable setting items, see <USB Memory Settings>(P. 555) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Scan and Store
Settings> <USB Memory Settings> <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)> Select the
setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
E-Mail
For information about changeable setting items, see <E-Mail Settings>(P. 538) .
Basic Operations
175
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <E-Mail Settings>
<Change Default Settings (E-Mail)> Select the setting Change the default value of the
selected item <Apply>
I-Fax
For information about changeable setting items, see <I-Fax Settings>(P. 540) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <I-Fax Settings>
<Change Default Settings (I-Fax)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected
item <Apply>
Shar
ed Folder/FTP Server
For information about changeable setting items, see
<File Settings>(P. 541) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <File Settings> <Change
Default Settings (File)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item
<Apply>
If you select <Initialize> on each setting scr
een, you can restore the default settings.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Basic Operations
176
Setting Sounds
1W2X-03F
The machine pr
oduces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or
error occurs. You can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.
Adjusting <Fax Volume>
1
Press the
( ) key.
2
Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.
T
o mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.
Adjusting <Other V
olume Set.>
1
Press the
( ) key.
For the model without fax functionality, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Other Volume Set.>.
3
Select a setting.
Setting Description Action
<Ring Tone> Sound produced when an incoming fax is
r
eceived
Go to step 4.
<TX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax sending is
complete
<RX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax receiving is
complete
<Scanning Done Tone> Sound produced when fax original scanning
is complete
Basic Operations
177
Setting Description Action
<Entry Tone> Conrmation sound each time a k
ey on the
operation panel or button on the display is
pressed
Select <On> (produce a tone) or
<Off> (not produce a tone).
<Invalid Entry Tone> Sound produced when an invalid key
operation is performed, such as when you
enter a number outside the valid setting
range
<Restock Supplies Tone> Sound produced when a toner cartridge is
almost empty
<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a paper jam or other
error occurs
<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation such as
copying or scanning is complete
<Energy Saver Alert> Sound produced when the machine enters
or e
xits sleep mode
<Original in Feeder Detection Tone> Sound produced when an original is loaded
in the feeder
4
Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.
T
o mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.
End sound only for error
In <Sound Only When Err
or Occurs>, select <On>, and select <Apply>.
Basic Operations
178
Entering Sleep Mode
1W2X-03H
The sleep mode function r
educes the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
save power simply by pressing
on the operation panel.
When in sleep mode
When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
When the machine is in oper
ation
When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
When a paper jam occurs
When the receiver of the external telephone or the optional handset is off the hook
When the machine is set such that the fax incoming ring will not sound
When the menu screen is displayed
When a job is waiting to be scanned to a USB memory device or to a computer
When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
When the machine is communicating with an LDAP server, etc.
When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed
When settings are being imported or exported
Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value
Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a
specied length of time. W
e recommend using the factory default settings (
<Timer/Energy
Settings>(P. 446) ) to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the
machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.
Basic Operations
179
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of
time that elapses befor
e the machine automatically enters sleep mode
<Apply>
Changing the Sleep Mode Setting to the Specied Time
You can congur
e a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specied time. You can also
congure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specied time.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep
Mode Exit Time Settings> Select <On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time <Apply>
Exiting Sleep Mode
You can press or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.
Y
ou can also tap the display to exit sleep mode.
If an external telephone or the optional handset is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when
you take the receiver off the hook.
Basic Operations
180
Registering Destinations
1W2X-03J
You can register frequently used fax/scan destinations in the Address Book and
easily select them when needed (
Registering Destinations in the Address
Book(P
. 183) ). Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from lists in the Address
Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers). You can also specify
destinations more quickly by using the following features.
Favorites
Registering a lot of addr
esses in the Address Book makes it dicult to nd the destination you need. To avoid this
situation, register frequently used destinations as Favorites. Destinations registered in Favorites can be searched from
the <
> in the Address Book.
Gr
oup Dial
You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can
send faxes or e-mails to multiple destinations at the same time. Groups can also be registered in Favorites.
Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 186)
Inde
x
The registered destinations are classied into indexes depending on the initial character or the type of address.
Changing indexes allows you to perform a destination search quickly. Tap
/ or ick the tar
get index sideways to
change the display.
<All>
Displays all the destinations r
egistered in the Address Book.
<
>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Favorites.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the selected
index.
< >
Displays destinations for fax
es.
<
>
Displays destinations for e-mails.
< >
Basic Operations
181
Displays destinations for I-Faxes.
< >
Displays destinations for shar
ed folders and FTP servers. Registration of destinations is performed from the
computer.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
< >
Displays a list of destinations r
egistered in Group Dial.
Use the computer to r
egister a shared folder or FTP server as the destination for scans.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Y
ou can save the Address Book as a le on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit
the Address Book). You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine.
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Y
ou can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book.
Address Book List(P. 612)
If your oce has an LD
AP server installed, you can make search to nd user information on the server and
register it in the Address Book. You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server
beforehand.
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
Basic Operations
182
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
1W2X-03K
This section describes ho
w to register destinations from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to
register destinations.
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
1
Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Register Dest.>
If a scr
een appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
3
Select the type of address to register.
Registering destinations with the LDAP server
If your oce has an LD
AP server installed, you can make search to nd user information on the server and
register it in the Address Book.
To make registration from the LDAP server, you need to specify the settings for connecting to the LDAP
server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
1
Select <LDAP Server>.
2
Select the LDAP server you are using.
3
Select conditions for user information to be searched.
Name, fax numbers, e-mail addr
esses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria
for searching destinations.
4
Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
T
o specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Select <Search Method>.
Basic Operations
183
6
Select conditions to display the search result.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Sear
ches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7
Select <Start Search>.
The users meeting your sear
ch criteria are displayed.
If the authentication scr
een appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the
machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
Registering LDAP
Servers
(P. 64)
8
Select a user you want to register in the Address Book.
9
Select <Apply>.
The user name and the fax number or e-mail address registered on the LDAP server of the selected
user are registered in the Address Book.
Registering destinations from recall settings
If recall settings are provided, you can select <Recall Settings> and register the destinations.
4
Select <Name>.
Registering <Name> is optional. If you r
egister <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
5
Enter the name, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
6
Select <Fax Number>, <E-Mail Address>, or <I-Fax Address>.
7
Enter the destination, and select <Apply>.
Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)
After selecting <Set Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.
Basic Operations
184
<ECM TX>
If an err
or occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper
image from being sent when setting <On>.
<TX Speed>
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the
transmission start speed downward.
<Long Distance>
Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering
overseas fax numbers.
Y
ou can also specify <ECM TX> and <TX Speed> from <Menu>
<Function Settings> <Send>
<Fax Settings>. However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings
of destinations r
egistered in the Address Book.
8
Select <Register As>.
9
Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.
If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Ke
ys> and enter the
destination number.
10
Select <Apply>.
Y
ou can make a group of destinations already registered in the Address Book and register it as one
destination. For more information, see
Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 186) .
When you want to change or delete items of information about destinations r
egistered in the Address Book,
see
Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book(P. 188) .
Basic Operations
185
Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group
1W2X-03L
Y
ou can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. This
section describes how to register a group from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to register a
group.
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Only destinations of the same type of addr
ess can be registered in the same group.
Shared folders or FTP servers cannot be registered in a group as destinations.
1
Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Register Dest.>
<Group>.
If a scr
een appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
3
Select <Name>.
Registering <Name> is optional. If you r
egister <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
4
Enter the name, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
5
Select <Destination>.
6
Select <Add>.
7
Select the index containing the destination you want to register.
Index(P. 181)
8
Select the destination.
Basic Operations
186
9
Repeat steps 6 to 8 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want to
r
egister, and then select <Apply>.
To view information about the destination
Select the tar
get destination, and select <Details>.
To remove a destination from the group
Select the destination that you want to remove from the group, and select <Delete>
<Yes>.
10
Select <Register As>.
11
Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.
If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Keys> and enter the
destination number.
12
Select <Apply>.
Basic Operations
187
Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address
Book
1W2X-03R
Y
ou can change your settings, such as changing a registered fax number or name, changing the type of destination
registered as a fax number to an e-mail destination, changing a coded dial number, and adding or deleting group
destinations. You can also delete destinations or groups.
If you delete a destination fr
om the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings.
Registering
Fr
equently Used Settings(P. 173)
1
Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select the index containing the destination you want to edit.
Index(P. 181)
3
Select the destination, and select <Edit>.
If you select <Details>, you can vie
w information about the destination.
To delete the destination, select <Delete>
<Yes>.
If a scr
een appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
4
After editing the necessary items, select <Apply>.
Basic Operations
188
Copying
Copying ................................................................................................................................................................
190
Copy Basic Features Screen .............................................................................................................................. 192
Basic Copy Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 194
Canceling Copies .......................................................................................................................................... 199
Checking the Copying Status and Log .......................................................................................................... 200
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ............................................................................................................ 202
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ................................................................................................... 203
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) .............................................................................................. 204
Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame) ..................................................................................... 205
Adjusting the Color ....................................................................................................................................... 206
Useful Copy Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 207
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) ................................................................................. 208
Collating Copies by Page .............................................................................................................................. 209
Making ID Card Copies ................................................................................................................................. 210
Copying
189
Copying
1W2X-03S
This chapter describes basic cop
y operations and various other useful functions, such as color balance adjustment and
ID card copy.
Using Basic Operations
Copy Basic Features Screen(P. 192)
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Canceling Copies(P. 199)
Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 200)
Enhancing Quality Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 202)
Selecting the Type of Original for
Cop
ying(P. 203)
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying
(Sharpness)(P
. 204)
Erasing Dark Borders When
Cop
ying (Erase Frame)(P. 205)
Adjusting the Color(P. 206)
Copying
190
Using Useful Cop
y Functions
Useful Copy Functions(P. 207)
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (N on 1)
(P. 208)
Collating Copies by Page(P. 209) Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)
Copying
191
Copy Basic Features Screen
1W2X-03U
When you select <Cop
y> in the Home screen, the Copy Basic Features screen appears.
Current setting status and setting buttons
The setting status, such as cop
y ratio, copy paper, and number of copies, are displayed. To copy correctly, be
sure to check the settings displayed here. When you want to change a setting, select the desired setting item.
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
<2-Sided>
Y
ou can select a combination of 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying for the original and printout paper.
Specify the detailed settings from
<Other Settings>. Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.
Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.
Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.
Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.
<N on 1>
You can select an "N on 1" pattern to arrange multi-page originals on the same side of one sheet. Specify the
detailed settings from <Other Settings>. Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
(P
. 208)
Does not apply N on 1.
Prints data for two consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints data for four consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
<Other Settings>
Y
ou can call the detailed settings or favorite settings that are not displayed in the Copy Basic Features screen.
Copying
192
<Reset>
Y
ou can collectively restore the default settings.
<Start>
Use this button to start cop
ying. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white copying. Selecting <Color> starts
color copying.
Copying
193
Basic Copy Operations
1W2X-03W
This section describes the basic oper
ation procedure used to copy an original.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
3
Select <Number of Copies> in the Copy Basic Features screen. Copy Basic Features
Scr
een(P. 192)
4
Enter the number of copies, and select <Close>.
If you have entered an incorrect value, use
to clear it.
5
Specify the copy settings as necessary.
Adjusting Density
2-Sided Copying
Enlarging or Reducing
Selecting Copy Paper
Adjusting Density
Adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in an original are excessively light
or dark. For e
xample, you can sharpen text and lines written using a pencil.
Adjusting Entire Density(P. 194)
Adjust the background density. You can make a clear copy of originals with colored
backgr
ounds, or originals such as a newspaper that is printed on thin paper on
which text or images on the other side are visible through the paper.
Adjusting
the Backgr
ound Density(P. 195)
Adjusting Entir
e Density
<Density> Adjust the density <Close>
Copying
194
Adjusting the Backgr
ound Density
<Density> <Adjust Background Density> <Adjust (Manual)> Adjust the background
density <Apply> <Close>
Depending on the original color, portions other than the backgr
ound may be affected.
If you select <Density by Color>, you can adjust the background density for each color.
2-Sided Copying
You can copy two pages of an original on both sides of the paper. You can also copy
a 2-sided original on both sides of the paper, or on two sheets of paper.
<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Available
Paper
(P. 705)
<Other Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select the type of 2-sided copying <Apply>
Types of 2-sided copying
The illustr
ation below shows the types of 2-sided copying.
<1-Sided->2-Sided>
<2-Sided->2-Sided>
<2-Sided->1-Sided>
Copying
195
<Orig./Fin. Type>
Specify the original orientation, opening type, and nishing type.
Enlarging or Reducing
You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <A5->A4>, or
by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1 %.
If you mak
e a setting for <N on 1> after setting the copy ratio, the setting of reduction ratio in <N on
1> takes priority.
<Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio
Preset copy ratio
Select a copy ratio.
Numeric keys
Y
ou can set any copy ratio from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Selecting Copy Paper
Specify the paper sour
ce that contains the paper to use for printing out copies.
You must rst specify the size and type of paper that is loaded in the paper source.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Copying
196
<Paper> Select the paper source <Close>
Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to make copies.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to make copies.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the optional cassette feeding module (Drawer 2) to make
copies.
For
information about other copy settings, see
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P
. 202) or
Useful Copy Functions(P. 207) .
6
Select <Start>.
Cop
ying starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Copies(P. 199)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
The original is automatically scanned.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
For 2-sided copying or N on 1 copying, the screen prompting you to load the next original is displayed.
1
Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.
Y
ou can also specify <Density>, <Original Type>, and <Color Balance> separately for each original.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entir
e original.
2
Select <Start Printing>.
When
the <Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled.
Do you want to print?> message is shown in the display.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
Copying
197
When copying originals with text or images that extend to the edges of the page
The edges of the original might not be copied. For mor
e information about the scan margins, see
Main
Unit(P
. 700) .
If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for
Functions(P. 175)
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P. 173)
LINKS
Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 200)
Copying
198
Canceling Copies
1W2X-03X
If you want to cancel cop
ying immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the screen or press
on the
oper
ation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.
Select <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying
Pr
ess
to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select a copy document to be canceled, and select
<Cancel> <Yes>.
Check the cop
y job status before canceling
<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> Select the copy document in the <Copy/Print Job Status>
tab <Cancel> <Yes>
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
199
Checking the Copying Status and Log
1W2X-03Y
Y
ou can check the current copy statuses and the logs for copied documents.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the cop
y job log.
<Display Job Log>(P. 568)
Useful in the Following Cases
When some long time has alr
eady passed after scanning of your original to be copied but printing of the
document has not started yet, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed.
When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been copied, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3
Check the copy statuses and logs.
To check the copy statuses
1
Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab.
Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the copy logs
1
Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Copy Job Log> tab.
<OK> is displayed when a document was copied successfully
, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be copied because it was canceled or there was some error.
Copying
200
Displays detailed information about the document.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
This number r
epresents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Canceling Copies(P. 199)
Copying
201
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality
1W2X-040
Y
ou can improve the copy quality by specifying more detailed settings, such as adjusting the brightness, erasing
unnecessary shadows, etc.
Selecting the Type of Original for
Cop
ying(P. 203)
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying
(Sharpness)(P
. 204)
Erasing Dark Borders When
Cop
ying (Erase Frame)(P. 205)
Adjusting the Color(P. 206)
Copying
202
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying
1W2X-041
You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the original type,
such as te
xt-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine
photos.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Original Type> Select the original type
<Text/Photo/Map (Speed)>
Priority is given to speed over image quality. This setting is only effective when selected for
color cop
ying.
<Text/Photo/Map>
Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos, or originals that include
detailed lines, such as maps.
<Text/Photo/Map (Quality)>
Priority is given to image quality over speed. You can also adjust the level of priority given to
the quality of the text or photos. Adjust the setting on the scale, and select <Apply>.
<Printed Image>
Suitable when making a clear copy of originals that contain printed photos (photos made of
halftone dots), such as magazines or pamphlets.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
203
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)
1W2X-042
You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurr
ed text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
Example:
If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Example:
If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Adjusting the Color(P. 206)
Copying
204
Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame)
1W2X-043
When copying originals that are smaller than the output paper size, frame lines may
appear ar
ound the edges in the copied image. When copying facing pages from
thick book, dark borders may appear. <Erase Frame> enables you to erase these
frame lines and dark borders.
The width of the fr
ame to erase is increased or decreased relative to the <Copy Ratio> setting.
<Erase Frame> is not available when using <N on 1>.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Erase Frame> <On> Specify the width of the frame to erase
<Apply> Select the original size on the <Scan Size> screen
Example:
If you want to erase the dark borders and frame lines
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
205
Adjusting the Color
1W2X-044
Adjust the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan, or black.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Color Balance> Select the color, and adjust the color level
<Apply>
Example:
If you want to make a copy with colors that more closely match the original
Example:
If you want to make a copy with brighter colors than the original
If you select <Fine Adjust>, you can adjust the le
vels of the three density areas for each color.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)(P. 204)
Copying
206
Useful Copy Functions
1W2X-045
Y
ou can copy multiple sheets onto one page, or copy by grouping sheets into complete sets in sequential page order.
Also, there is a function to copy both sides of a card, etc. onto one page.
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (N on 1)
(P. 208)
Collating Copies by Page(P. 209) Making ID Card Copies(P. 210)
Copying
207
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
1W2X-046
You can reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange all pages on one side
of the paper. Y
ou can save the number of sheets as the document can be copied on
fewer pages than those of the original.
Using <N on 1> r
educes the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). If the
copying process has not started, you can further reduce the image size by lowering the numeric value that is
automatically displayed. But the edges of the original might not be copied if you increase it.
<N on 1> is not available when using <Erase Frame>.
When you copy multiple originals onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <N on 1> Select the number of pages to be combined, and select
<Ne
xt>
Select the original size on the <Scan Size> screen On the <Output Size> screen, select
the paper sour
ce that contains the paper you want to use
Number of pages to be combined
Select the number of pages to be combined on one side of paper. For e
xample, <4 on 1> means that "a four-
page original can be combined on a single sheet."
<Layout>
Specify ho
w to arrange the originals on the page.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
208
Collating Copies by Page
1W2X-047
When preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals, set <Collate> to <On> to
collate copies in sequential page or
der. This function is useful when preparing
handouts for meetings or presentations.
<Copy> <Other Settings> <Collate> <On>
<Off>
The copies ar
e grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page
original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
<On>
The copies ar
e grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three
copies of a ve-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
209
Making ID Card Copies
1W2X-048
You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same
side of a page. This function is useful when cop
ying a driver's license or ID card.
<Cop
y Ratio> is automatically set to <100% 1:1>.
Place the card on the platen glass <ID Card Copy> <Start> Turn the card over <Scan Next>
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Copying
210
Faxing
Faxing ...................................................................................................................................................................
212
Fax Basic Features Screen ................................................................................................................................. 215
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................. 216
Canceling Sending Faxes .............................................................................................................................. 224
Receiving Faxes ................................................................................................................................................. 225
Useful Functions When Sending ....................................................................................................................... 228
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) .................................................................. 229
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ...................................................................................... 232
Saving a Copy of a Sent Original ................................................................................................................... 234
Various Receiving Methods .............................................................................................................................. 235
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ............................................................. 236
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ...................................................................................... 238
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents ......................................................................... 240
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .................................................................................................. 242
Sending PC Faxes ......................................................................................................................................... 243
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ................................................................................................................................. 245
Sending I-Faxes ............................................................................................................................................ 246
Receiving I-Faxes .......................................................................................................................................... 253
Faxing
211
Faxing
1W2X-049
This chapter describes fax settings, basic fax oper
ations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as
PC Fax to send documents directly from computers, Address Book to specify destinations easily, and Forwarding to
receive faxes even when you are out of the oce.
Y
ou need to complete some procedures before using fax functions.
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions
(P. 79)
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering
Destinations
(P. 181)
Using Basic Oper
ations
Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 215)
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Using Useful Functions When Sending
Useful Functions When Sending(P. 228)
Recalling Previously Used
Settings for Sending (Recall
Settings)(P
. 229)
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call
(Manual Sending)(P
. 232)
Saving a Copy of a Sent
Original
(P. 234)
Faxing
212
Receiving Accor
ding to Your Purposes
Various Receiving Methods(P. 235)
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 236)
Forwar
ding All the Received Documents
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 238)
Sending Fax
es Directly from Your Computer
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 242)
Faxing
213
Sending and Receiving Fax
es via the Internet
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 245)
Faxing
214
Fax Basic Features Screen
1W2X-04A
Selecting <Fax> in the Home scr
een displays the FAX Basic Features screen that appears when you sending faxes.
<Enter Dest.> tab
Select this tab to dir
ectly enter a destination.
<Specify Destination> tab
Select this tab to sear
ch for an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or specify a destination using the recall
settings.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 229)
<TX/RX Settings> tab
Select this tab to specify the scanning settings. Y
ou can change the RX mode (
Deciding Which Fax
Receive Mode to Use
(P. 80) ) of the machine.
<Conrm Destination>
Y
ou can check the name and fax number of specied destinations as well as the number of specied
destinations. You can also change the fax number or cancel specication of destinations.
<Address Book>
Specify destinations r
egistered in the Address Book.
<Reset>
Y
ou can collectively restore the default settings.
<Start>
Use this button to start faxing.
Faxing
215
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes
1W2X-04C
This section describes the basic oper
ation procedure used to fax an original.
Y
ou need to complete some procedures before using fax functions.
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions
(P. 79)
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Fax> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen.
Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 215)
If the destinations set b
y the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset
the settings before sending.
4
Specify the destination.
Specifying from Address Book
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Entering Destinations Directly
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
Specifying from Address Book
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of
r
egistered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient
names.
Y
ou need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering
Destinations
(P. 181)
1
Select <Address Book>.
2
Select an index.
Index(P. 181)
Faxing
216
3
Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.
If a destination is selected fr
om <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can be
displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address
Book. Y
ou can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.
To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
1
Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Enter a three-digit number.
If you have enter
ed an incorrect value, use
to clear it.
If a conrmation scr
een appears
When <Conrm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and
the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are
shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,
select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number.
Displaying Destinations in
Addr
ess Book(P. 404)
Faxing
217
Entering Destinations Directly
For a destination that is not r
egistered in the Address Book, specify it by entering a fax number.
1
Enter the fax number in the <Enter Dest.> tab.
If your machine is connected to a PB
X (Private Branch Exchange), select <R> before entering the destination.
If <R> is not available, you need to register the R-key settings.
<R-Key Setting>(P. 546)
If you have enter
ed an incorrect value, use
to clear it.
Adding a destination
T
o enter a second or subsequent destination, select <Next Dest.>.
If a conrmation screen appears
When <Conrm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, the input screen reappears so that you can
conrm the destination (
Conrming the Enter
ed Fax Number(P. 406) ). Enter the destination
again.
Sending a fax abroad
Enter the international access code, the country code, and the fax number to specify the destination.
If you are not able to successfully connect to a recipient, select <Pause> and insert a pause between
numbers.
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
If your oce has an LD
AP server installed, you can specify a destination using user
information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the
appropriate user information and specify it as destination.
Y
ou need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand.
Registering LDAP
Servers
(P. 64)
1
Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select the LDAP server you are using.
3
Select conditions for user information to be searched.
Faxing
218
Name, fax numbers, e-mail addr
esses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for
searching destinations.
4
Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
T
o specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Select <Search Method>.
6
Select conditions to display the search result.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7
Select <Start Search>.
The users meeting your sear
ch criteria are displayed.
If
the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine
and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
8
Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select
<Apply>.
Adding a destination
T
o send a fax to multiple destinations at a time (sequential broadcast), repeat the appropriate steps to
enter all destinations.
You can also recall previously used destinations.
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending
(Recall Settings)(P
. 229)
Faxing
219
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary
.
1
Select <Conrm Destination>.
2
Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
If you select the Group Dial check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by
selecting <Details> <Destination>.
3
Select <Yes>.
5
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Adjusting Image Quality
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
Adjusting Image Quality
You can select the resolution suitable for your original type. The higher the
r
esolution is, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.
Selecting Resolution(P. 220)
You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in an original are too light
or dark. Adjusting Density(P. 220)
You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos. Adjusting Sharpness(P. 221)
Selecting Resolution
Select <Resolution> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Select the resolution
Adjusting Density
Select <Density> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Adjust the density <Apply>
Faxing
220
Adjusting Sharpness
Select <Sharpness> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
Example:
If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Example:
If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the
feeder.
The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals ar
e placed on the platen
glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.
Faxing
221
Select <2-Sided Original> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for originals whose images on the fr
ont and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
6
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the fax
es are sent.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.
1
Select the original size.
When ther
e is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.
2
Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
3
Select <Start Sending>.
The faxes are sent.
If you always want to send fax
es with the same settings:
Changing the Default Settings for
Functions
(P. 175)
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P
. 173)
If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook:
<Off-Hook Alarm>(P. 543)
LINKS
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
Faxing
222
Useful Functions When Sending(P. 228)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
223
Canceling Sending Faxes
1W2X-04E
If you want to cancel sending fax
es immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or press
on
the oper
ation panel. You can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.
Select <Cancel> on the screen during fax transmission
Pr
ess
to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select
<Cancel> <Yes>.
Check the transmission status before canceling
<Status Monitor> <TX Job> Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab <Cancel> <Yes>
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
224
Receiving Faxes
1W2X-04F
This section describes the methods for r
eceiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to
complete some procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings.
Conguring Initial
Settings for Fax Functions
(P. 79)
The machine can print r
eceived fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper. If received fax documents are
printed on other paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two
separate sheets of paper.
Methods for Receiving Fax
es
The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up
by following the procedure in
Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes(P. 226) .
<Auto>
Dedicated to receiving faxes
The machine r
eceives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot
talk to the caller.
<Fax/Tel (Auto
Switch)>
When the call is a fax
The machine r
eceives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.
Y
ou need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
<Manual>
When the call is a fax
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, select <Fax> <Start
Receiving> to receive faxes.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you do not hear a beep, start your
conversation.
Y
ou need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
Faxing
225
Y
ou can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within
a specied timeframe.
<Switch to Auto RX>(P. 551)
<Answering
Machine>
When the call is a fax
After an incoming call rings, the machine r
eceives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the
handset before the answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the
caller.
Y
ou need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.
Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings.
We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the
message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.
<Net Switch>
The machine distinguishes between fax and telephone calls. This mode is only available for
certain countries and r
equires a subscription to a network switch service.
Y
ou need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or r
eceive faxes
properly.
If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes
automatically.
If you pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using
the telephone to enter a specic ID number.
Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)
(P
. 227)
Setting Up the Machine to Receive Fax
es
1
Select <Fax> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
2
Select <RX Mode> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab of the Fax Basic Features screen.
Fax
Basic Featur
es Screen(P. 215)
3
Select the receiving method.
When selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, select <Apply>.
Faxing
226
<Ring Start Time>
Enables you to specify the dur
ation during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a
telephone call.
<Incoming Ring Time>
Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call.
<Action After Ring>
Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is
ringing. Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax.
If you want to print r
eceived documents on both sides of paper:
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 550)
If you want to print information, such as r
eception date and time, at the bottom of received documents:
<Print RX Page Footer>(P. 553)
If you want to continue printing e
ven when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low:
<Continue
Print. When Cart. Lo
w>(P. 548)
Using a T
elephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)
When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just
enter a specic ID number with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.
When the telephone is not dir
ectly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not
available.
1
When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.
2
If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.
For mor
e information about setting the ID number, see
<Remote RX>(P. 551) .
3
Hang up the handset.
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Various Receiving Methods(P. 235)
Faxing
227
Useful Functions When Sending
1W2X-04H
This section describes ho
w to forward a fax again to a previously specied destination, how to send a fax after a phone
call, and how to save a copy of a fax document.
Recalling Previously Used
Settings for Sending (Recall
Settings)(P
. 229)
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call
(Manual Sending)(P
. 232)
Saving a Copy of a Sent
Original
(P. 234)
Faxing
228
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall
Settings)
1W2X-04J
You can recall the destinations specied in the past. When you specify a pr
eviously
used destination, the machine also sets the same fax settings such as density you
used the last time you sent documents to that destination.
When <Restrict Resending fr
om Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature.
Disabling Use of
Pr
eviously Used Destinations(P. 404)
Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and
disables this feature.
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P
. 404)
The destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature.
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call
(Manual Sending)(P
. 232)
When you specify a destination using this featur
e, any destinations that you have already specied are
deleted.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Fax> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen.
Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 215)
If the destinations set b
y the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset
the settings before sending.
4
Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
5
Select the destination.
When you tr
ansmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed
in the log, but all the destinations are specied.
Faxing
229
The selected destination and the fax settings used at the time ar
e specied. You can also change the
settings before sending.
To delete destinations
When you tr
ansmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1
Select <Conrm Destination>.
2
Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
If you select the Gr
oup Dial check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by
selecting <Details>
<Destination>.
3
Select <Yes>.
6
Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic Operations for Sending
Faxes(P. 216)
7
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the fax
es are sent.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.
1
Select the original size.
When ther
e is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.
2
Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
Faxing
230
3
Select <Start Sending>.
The fax
es are sent.
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Faxing
231
Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending)
1W2X-04K
You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a
beep o
ver the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Select
<Start> to send your faxes.
Y
ou need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the originals in Manual Sending.
When the original is placed on the platen glass, only one page can be sent.
2
Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen.
Fax Basic Features Screen(P. 215)
If the destinations set b
y the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset
the settings before sending.
4
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Basic Operations for Sending
Fax
es(P. 216)
5
Dial the recipient's fax number.
6
Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes.
If you hear a beep, pr
oceed to step 7.
7
Select <Start>.
If you place the original on the platen glass, select the original size.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
8
Hang up the handset.
Faxing
232
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
233
Saving a Copy of a Sent Original
1W2X-04L
In addition to the address specied when the fax is sent, you can also send fax
ed
documents to a preset storage address for archiving. This is useful for keeping a log
of what has been sent. You can specify a fax number, an e-mail address, a shared
folder on the computer, an FTP server or an I-Fax as the storage address.
Only destinations in the Addr
ess Book can be specied as a storage address. To use the Address Book, the
destination must be registered beforehand.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Archive TX Document> Select
<On> and select <Ar
chive Address>
Select the check box for the target archive destination in the
Addr
ess Book, and select <Apply>
<Apply>
Faxing
234
Various Receiving Methods
1W2X-04R
Y
ou can store received faxes in the machine's memory without printing them. You can reduce fax paper waste by
checking the detailed information of fax documents and only printing necessary documents.
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 236)
Faxing
235
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory
Reception)
1W2X-04S
You can store received faxes into memory of the machine, and then print them later.
This featur
e can prevent unauthorized persons from seeing condential documents
unintentionally.
Storing Documents into Memory(P. 236)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 236)
Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 237)
Storing Documents into Memory
T
o store received documents into memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <On>. You can also specify optional settings
such as a time setting that species a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in
memory.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax
Inbo
x>
<Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <On> in <Use Memory Lock> Specify each setting
<Apply>
<Report Print>
Enables you to print RX Result r
eports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, select
<On>. You also need to set <RX Result Report> to <On>.
RX Result Report(P. 612)
<Memory Lock Time>
Specify a period of time during the day in which r
eceived documents are stored in memory. If you do not set a
period of time, the machine stores every document into memory when Memory Reception is turned on.
Printing Documents in Memory
T
o print received documents in memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are printed.
Y
ou cannot select a specic document for printing.
If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specied, the documents are automatically printed at the
specied time.
Faxing
236
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax
Inbo
x>
<Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Memory Lock> <Apply>
Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory
You can check an outline of each document stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and number of pages
sent. You can also select and forward a document stored in memory, and delete an unnecessary document, if any.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <RX Job>.
3
In the <RX Job Status> tab, select the document you want to check/forward/delete.
Displays detailed information about the document.
T
o forward the document, select <Forward>, and specify the appropriate destination.
To delete the document, select <Delete>
<Yes>.
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
237
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically
1W2X-04U
The machine can forwar
d all the received documents to specied destinations. Even if you are out of the oce, you
can receive fax information anytime, anywhere.
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically(P. 238)
Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 238)
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 238)
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically
While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings>
<Forwarding Function> Select <On> in <Use Forwarding Function> <Forwarding Destination>
Select the check box for the target forwarding destination in the Address Book, and select
<Apply> <Apply>
Printing Documents to be Forwarded
If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents
whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding
Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.
Storing Documents that Failed to be Forwarded in Memory
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings>
<Store Images in Memory> <Only When Error Occurs>
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents Stor
ed in Memory
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
Faxing
238
2
Select <Fax Forwarding Errors>.
3
Select the document you want to print/resend/delete.
Displays detailed information about the document.
T
o print the document, select <Print>
<Yes>.
T
o resend the document, select <Forward>, select the check box for the target destination, and then
select <Apply>.
To delete the document, select <Delete>
<Yes>.
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
239
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received
Documents
1W2X-04W
The statuses and communication logs for sent and r
eceived fax and I-Fax documents can be checked separately for
sending and receiving.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs. <Display Job
Log>
(P. 568)
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <TX Job> or <RX Job>.
3
Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.
To check the statuses for sent and received documents
1
Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> or <RX Job Status> tab.
Displays detailed information about the document.
If
you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the
screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Destination>.
To check the communication logs for sent and received documents
1
Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> or <RX Job Log> tab.
<OK> is displayed when a document was sent or r
eceived successfully, and <Error> is displayed when
a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there was some error.
Displays detailed information about the document.
Faxing
240
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
This number r
epresents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Receiving I-Faxes(P. 253)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 610)
Faxing
241
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)
1W2X-04X
Y
ou can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature
eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to specify the basic fax settings (
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
(P. 79) ) and install the fax driver on your computer. For more
information about how to install the fax driver, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Sending PC Faxes(P. 243)
Depending on the oper
ating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in
this manual may differ from your screens.
About the Fax Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the fax driver scr
een displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that
is not in the User's Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used
settings and how to set up those features.
Faxing
242
Sending PC Faxes
1W2X-04Y
When <Allo
w Fax Driver TX> is set to <Off> on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers.
Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 406)
Y
ou need to enable Department ID Management on the fax driver you are using if Department ID
Management is enabled on the machine. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
Ho
w to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2
Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].
3
Specify the destination.
To specify only one destination
1
Click the [Enter Destination] tab.
2
Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI).
To specify multiple destinations at once
1
Click the [Select Destination] tab.
2
Click [Add Destination].
3
Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI), and click [OK].
Faxing
243
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations.
Y
ou can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3.
If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings]
[Add Outside Dialing
Pr
ex to G3/G4/IP Fax Number] and enter the number in [Outside Dialing Prex]. The specied number is
added to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials.
To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book.
Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and
check detailed information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of
pages. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
When
the [Conrm Fax Number] or [Conrm URI] eld is active, also enter the appropriate number in the
eld. The setting of whether to conrm entered numbers can be changed in the fax driver screen. For
more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
4
Click [Send] to send the document.
LINKS
When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 739)
Faxing
244
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)
1W2X-050
The Internet Fax (I-Fax) function allo
ws you to send and receive faxes over the Internet. Originals are sent attached as
TIFF images les to e-mail. Since a telephone connection is not used, you can send faxes to distant locations and send
documents with many pages without worrying about communications charges. Some advance preparation is required,
such as specifying the mail server settings.
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Receiving I-Faxes(P. 253)
Faxing
245
Sending I-Faxes
1W2X-051
T
o send a fax to a computer or another I-Fax-compatible device, specify an e-mail address instead of a fax number as
the destination. If you send an I-Fax to a computer, it is sent as an e-mail attachment in TIFF format. And in the same
way as when you send e-mail to a computer, you can specify multiple destinations and specify Cc and Bcc destinations.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <I-Fax> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic Features Screen(P. 278)
4
Specify the destination.
Specifying from Address Book
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Entering Destinations Directly
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
Specifying from Address Book
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of
r
egistered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient
names.
Y
ou need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering
Destinations
(P. 181)
1
Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select <To>.
3
Select an index.
Index(P. 181)
Faxing
246
4
Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.
If a destination is selected fr
om <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Basic Features screen for I-Fax
sending can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address
Book. Y
ou can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.
To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
1
Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select <To>.
3
Enter a three-digit number.
If you have enter
ed an incorrect value, use
to clear it.
If a conrmation scr
een appears
Faxing
247
When <Conrm
When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and
the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are
shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,
select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number.
Displaying Destinations in
Addr
ess Book(P. 404)
Entering Destinations Directly
For a destination that is not r
egistered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an I-Fax address.
1
Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Enter the I-Fax address, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
If your oce has an LD
AP server installed, you can specify a destination using user
information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the
appropriate user information and specify it as destination.
Y
ou need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand.
Registering LDAP
Servers
(P. 64)
1
Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select the LDAP server you are using.
3
Select conditions for user information to be searched.
Name, fax numbers, e-mail addr
esses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for
searching destinations.
Faxing
248
4
Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
T
o specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Select <Search Method>.
6
Select conditions to display the search result.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7
Select <Start Search>.
The users meeting your sear
ch criteria are displayed.
If
the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine
and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
8
Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select
<Apply>.
If a screen on which a destination is already specied appears
Y
ou can only send to your own e-mail address. To send to other destinations, you must congure the send
function authentication settings so that e-mail transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator
for details.
LDAP Server Authentication(P. 361) .
Specifying destinations fr
om the transmission records
You can also recall previously used destinations.
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/
Saving (Recall Settings)(P
. 310)
5
Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.
Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the
destination.
Faxing
249
If you selected <LD
AP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specied in the <To>
eld.
<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary
.
1
Select <Conrm Destination>.
2
Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
If you select the Group check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting
<Details> <Destination>.
3
Select <Yes>.
6
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
For mor
e information about each setting, see
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or
FTP Server(P
. 288) or
Scanning Clearly(P. 300) .
7
Specify the subject, message, and reply-to address for the e-mail as necessary.
To specify subject/message
1
Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2
Select <Subject>
3
Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.
4
Select <Message>.
5
Enter the message, and select <Apply>.
6
Select <Apply>.
To specify reply-to address
Specify the r
eply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of
the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the
Faxing
250
Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see
Registering Destinations(P. 181) .
1
Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2
Select <Specify from Address Book>.
3
Select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>.
The reply-to address that can be specied is always one of the e-mail addresses registered in the
Address Book.
8
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 224)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the I-Fax
es are sent.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass,
and select <Scan Ne
xt>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Start Sending>.
The I-Faxes are sent.
If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears
Enter the user name and passwor
d, and select <Apply>.
If a Send Error Occurs
Error notications ar
e sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may
result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that
you clear the mailbox periodically.
To clear the mailbox
When
the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail
account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
Faxing
251
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [TX Settings] [Network Settings - E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4
Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5
Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
E-mail is deleted fr
om the mailbox.
If you always want to send with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
If you want to r
egister a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P
. 173)
If you want to specify the I-Fax sender name:
<Register Unit Name>(P. 538)
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
252
Receiving I-Faxes
1W2X-052
When an I-Fax Arrives
When an I-Fax arrives, the Data indicator on the oper
ation panel blinks. After the I-Fax is completely received, the
document is printed out automatically and the indicator goes out.
T
o cancel reception, select <Status Monitor>
<RX Job> select a document in the <RX Job Status> tab
<Delete> <Yes>.
Receiving I-Fax
es Manually
If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if you want to congure the machine so
that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes manually. If there is a document
on the server, printing begins.
<Status Monitor> <RX Job> <Check I-Fax RX>
Printout Paper
Regar
dless of the received document size, incoming I-Faxes are printed at the size specied in <RX Print Size>.
<RX
Print Size>(P
. 549)
If paper of the size specied in <RX Print Size> is not loaded in the paper dr
awer, the <No Paper> error
message is displayed.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
If you want to print r
eceived documents on both sides of paper:
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 549)
If you want to continue printing e
ven when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low:
<Continue
Print. When Cart. Lo
w>(P. 548)
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 240)
Faxing
253
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................
255
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 256
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 258
Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 260
Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 262
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................... 263
Printing via Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 264
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ......................................................................... 267
Printing
254
Printing
1W2X-053
Ther
e are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer
driver or print image les from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.
Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.
Printing from a Computer(P. 256)
Useful Functions When Printing
Y
ou can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print les stored in a USB memory device.
Various Printing Methods(P. 262)
Printing from Mobile Devices
Linking mobile de
vices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 321)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Printing
255
Printing from a Computer
1W2X-054
Y
ou can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the
online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 256)
To Use the Optional Items(P. 256)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
To Use the Optional Items
If the optional cassette feeding module is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on the printer
driver.
T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer Properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab Select the [550
Sheet Dr
awer] check box
[OK]
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes ho
w to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
Normally
, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing.
Printing
256
By setting <Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing> to <On>, you can print fr
om the paper source specied
in the printer driver, regardless of the paper settings on the machine.
<Prioritize Driver Settings When
Printing>(P
. 492)
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
Switch the tab accor
ding to the settings.
4
Click [Print] or [OK].
Printing starts.
If you want to cancel printing, see
Canceling Prints(P. 258) .
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 260)
When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 739)
Printing
257
Canceling Prints
1W2X-055
Y
ou can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 258)
From the Operation Panel(P. 259)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
Open
the printer folder (
Displaying the Printer Folder(P
. 732) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]
[Cancel].
3
Click [Yes].
Printing of the selected document is canceled.
Se
veral pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
Y
ou can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:
Checking Current Status of Print
Documents
(P. 419)
Canceling from an application
On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
Printing
258
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using
or <Status Monitor>.
Pr
ess
to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel> <Yes>.
Check the Print Job Status Befor
e Canceling
<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> Select the document in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab
<Cancel> <Yes>
Se
veral pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 260)
Printing
259
Checking the Printing Status and Log
1W2X-056
Y
ou can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. <Display Job Log>(P. 568)
Useful in the Following Cases
When your documents ar
e not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3
Check the print statuses and logs.
To check the print statuses
1
Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab.
Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the print logs
1
Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Print Job Log> tab.
<OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully
, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
Printing
260
Displays detailed information about the document.
The displayed document name or user name may not r
eect the actual document or user name.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
This number r
epresents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
Canceling Prints(P. 258)
Printing
261
Various Printing Methods
1W2X-057
This section describes ho
w to print a document by adding a PIN, and how to print a le stored on a USB memory
device without using the printer driver.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure
Print)(P
. 263)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory
Media Print)(P
. 267)
Printing
262
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
1W2X-058
By setting a PIN to a document when printing fr
om a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,
and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure
Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts
of condential documents from being left unattended.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 264)
Printing
263
Printing via Secure Print
1W2X-059
This section describes ho
w to print a document from an application as a secured document. The rst part of this
section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how
to print the secured document on the machine.
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 264)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 265)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 266)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
The [Information] pop-up scr
een is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
Switch the tab accor
ding to the settings.
5
Click [Print] or [OK].
After the secur
ed document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be
printed.
Printing
264
Printing Out Secured Documents
Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secur
ed Documents(P. 266) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine
and can no longer be printed.
If secur
ed documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from
printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon
as you can.
You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.
<Status Monitor>
<Device Information> <Secure Print Memory Usage>
1
Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
Y
ou cannot proceed to the next step if the <Remote Scanner> screen shown below is displayed. In this
case, select
to close the screen, and select <Secure Print>.
2
Select the check box for the secured document to print, and select <Start>.
Y
ou can select multiple documents that have the same PIN.
If a screen for user selection is displayed
If
secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is
displayed prior to the screen for le selection. Select your user name.
Deleting a secured document
You can collectively delete multiple documents. Select the check box for the secured document to delete,
and select <Delete>.
3
Enter the PIN, and select <Apply>.
When you select multiple documents with differ
ent PINs in step 2, a message is displayed. Select <Close>,
and select the secured documents again in step 2.
Printing starts.
If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
<Yes>.
Printing
265
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is
deleted within a certain period of time.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Function Settings>.
3
Select <Secure Print>.
If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
4
Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected
Set <Use Secur
e Print> to <On>.
Disabling Secure Print
Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and select <Apply>.
The secur
ed document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time
specied here elapses.
6
Select <Apply>.
7
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 260)
Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 408)
Printing
266
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media
Print)
1W2X-05A
Y
ou can print les directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove
the USB memory device, see
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107) .
1
Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select the check box for the le to print.
Y
ou can select multiple les.
T
o clear a selection, select the le you have selected (
) again.
Selecting a folder displays its contents. T
o return to the folder in the upper level, select
.
Folders and les in a le
vel deeper than the fth directory are not displayed.
When you move to another folder, the previous le selections will be cleared.
To select all les
1
Select <Select All>.
T
o clear all selections, select <Clear Selection>.
2
If le types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF Files> or <PDF Files>.
To change the le display method
Y
ou can select the le display method from "Preview"/"Details."
Preview
Details
Printing
267
Y
ou cannot view the contents of a PDF le.
You can specify the le display method used to display the <Memory Media Print> screen.
<Default
Display Settings>(P
. 560)
To change the le sort or
der
You can change the sort order of the les in a USB memory device.
Y
ou can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default
setting for the le sort order.
<File Sort Default Settings>(P. 561)
1
Select <Sort Files>.
2
Select the criteria for le sorting.
When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, les ar
e sorted based on the
modication dates and time of the les.
3
Select <Apply>.
4
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Y
ou can select <Reset> to restore all the default print settings.
<Paper>
Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.
Printing
268
Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print les.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print les.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the optional cassette feeding module (Drawer 2) to make
copies.
When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Brightness>
You can adjust the brightness of images.
When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Number of Copies>
Enter the number of copies.
When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<2-Sided Printing>
You can select 1-sided printing or 2-sided printing.
Prints on one side of paper.
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally
when bound.
Printing
269
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically
when bound.
<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 705)
<N on 1>
<N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF les.
You can select an "N on 1" pattern to print multiple pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Does not apply N on 1.
Prints two pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints four pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
(PDF only)
Prints eight pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
For a PDF le, you can print 9 or 16 pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper b
y using <N on 1>
under <Set PDF Details>.
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.
Printing
270
<2-Sided Printing>
Y
ou can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1> (
JPEG les only)
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Original Type>
Y
ou can select the type of original depending on the image to print.
<Photo Priority>
Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly
.
<Text Priority>
Gives priority to printing text clearly.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
Prints images with ne gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.
<Error Diffusion>
Prints images with small text or ne lines with a clear nish.
<Set PDF Details>
You can change the print settings for PDFs.
Printing
271
<2-Sided Printing>
Y
ou can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1>
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. Y
ou can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Print Range>
Specify pages you want to print.
<All Pages>
Prints all pages.
<Specied Pages>
Specify the r
ange of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <Start Page> and <End Page>,
and select <Apply>.
When the specied page r
ange does not match any of the pages of the PDF le, printing is not performed.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge ar
eas or paper may be partly smudged
depending on the document.
<Print Comments>
This setting species whether to print annotations in the PDF le.
Printing
272
<Off>
Prints no annotations.
<Auto>
Prints only those annotations that ar
e specied to be printed in the PDF le.
<Password to Open Document>
You can print password protected PDF les by entering the password required to open them. Enter the
password, and select <Apply>.
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of
image contained in one document. See
<Halftones>(P. 529) for the description of the setting.
<Pur
e Black Text>
You can print black text of which color information is "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,"
using only the K (black) toner. See
<Pure Black Text>(P. 524) for the description of the setting.
<Black Overprint>
Specify the printing method used when black te
xt overlaps a colored background or gure. See
<Black
Overprint>(P
. 524) for the description of the setting.
<RGB Source Prole>
Select the source prole for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See
<RGB Source Pr
ole>(P. 525) for the description of the setting.
<CMYK Simulation Prole>
This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See
<CMYK Simulation Pr
ole>(P. 526) for the description of the setting.
<Use Grayscale Prole>
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale
prole of the machine. See
<Use Grayscale Pr
ole>(P. 526) for the description of the setting.
<Output Prole>
Select the appropriate prole for print data. This option can be specied for each image type in one
document. See
<Output Pr
ole>(P. 527) for the description of the setting.
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Prole>. See
<Matching Method>(P. 528) for the description of the setting.
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to o
verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output. See
<Composite
Overprint>(P. 530) for the description of the setting.
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See <Grayscale Conversion>(P. 530) for the
description of the setting.
<Print Quality>
<Density>
Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See <Density>(P. 494) for the description of the setting.
<T
oner Save>
Printing
273
Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other
appear
ance characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job. See
<Toner Save>(P. 495)
for the description of the setting.
<Gr
adation>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High
1>. See
<Gradation>(P. 495) for the description of the setting.
<Density Fine Adjustment>
When ne lines or small te
xt are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See
<Density Fine
Adjustment>(P
. 495) for the description of the setting.
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to process print data. See
<Resolution>(P. 496) for the description of the setting.
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in
<Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See
<Special Smoothing Mode>(P. 496) for the description of
the setting.
<T
oner Volume Correction>
When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that
the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See
<Toner Volume Correction>(P. 497) for the
description of the setting.
<Line Contr
ol>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See
<Line Control>(P. 497) for the description
of the setting.
<Width Adjustment>
Congur
e a setting to print text or ne lines in bold. See
<Width Adjustment>(P. 498) for the
description of the setting.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Congur
e the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using
applications) or text with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>.
You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See
<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 498) for the
description of the setting.
<Gr
adation Smoothing>
Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations
created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger
smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See
<Gradation Smoothing>(P. 499) for the description of the setting.
5
Select <Start>.
Selecting <B&W> starts black and white printing. Selecting <Color> starts color printing.
If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.
If you always want to print with the same settings: Memory Media Print(P. 175)
LINKS
<Store/Access Files>(P. 555)
Printing
274
Scanning
Scanning ..............................................................................................................................................................
276
Scan Basic Features Screen ............................................................................................................................... 278
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ......................................................................................................... 281
Scanning and Saving to a Computer ............................................................................................................. 282
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device ........................................................................................................... 284
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server ......................................................... 288
Canceling Sending Documents ..................................................................................................................... 297
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals ........................................................................................... 298
Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................ 300
Adjusting Image Quality ............................................................................................................................... 301
Adjusting Density ......................................................................................................................................... 302
Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ........................................................................................ 303
Useful Scanning Functions ............................................................................................................................... 305
Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files ..................................................................................................... 306
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size) .............................................................. 309
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ....................................................... 310
Specifying E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................................. 313
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .................................................................................................. 316
Scanning Documents from an Application .................................................................................................... 317
Using ScanGear MF ...................................................................................................................................... 319
Scanning
275
Scanning
1W2X-05C
Y
ou can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.
Whichever way you use, the scanned originals are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan
function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.
T
o use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of
software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the
online manual website. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the
machine to the installed software.
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85)
Depending on the oper
ating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the
screens in this manual may differ from your screens.
Using Basic Oper
ations
You can scan and save originals to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also save
originals to a USB memory device or send them as e-mail attachments.
Scan Basic Features Screen(P. 278)
Basic Operations for Scanning
Originals(P
. 281)
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
Checking Status and Log for Scanned
Originals(P
. 298)
Enhancing Quality
Y
ou can nd instructions on how to resolve problems such as "blurry photos" or "text unreadable due to too deep
color of the paper."
Scanning Clearly(P. 300)
Eciently
, Reliably
You can nd instructions on how to enhance eciency when sending data and descriptions of useful settings.
Scanning
276
Useful Scanning Functions(P. 305)
Scanning fr
om a Computer
You can scan originals placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned originals are saved to the computer. You
can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or
word-processing application.
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P. 316)
Scanning from Mobile Devices
Linking mobile de
vices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
scan originals set on this machine.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 321)
Scanning
277
Scan Basic Features Screen
1W2X-05E
When you select <Scan> in the Home scr
een, the Scan Basic Features screen appears.
<Computer>
Saves the scanned data to a computer. Basic Features Screen for Computer Scanning(P. 278)
<Remote Scanner>
Puts the machine into the online status when originals ar
e scanned from a computer.
Using Your
Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P
. 316)
<USB Memory>
Saves the scanned data to a USB memory device. Basic Features Screen for USB Scanning(P. 279)
<E-Mail>
Sends the scanned data b
y e-mail.
Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File
Saving(P
. 279)
<I-Fax>
Sends the scanned data b
y I-Fax.
Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File
Saving(P
. 279)
<File>
Saves the scanned data to a shared folder or FTP server. Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax
Sending/File Saving(P
. 279)
Basic Features Screen for Computer Scanning
Scan type
Select the scan setting. Scanning and Saving to a Computer(P. 282)
Scanning
278
<Start>
Use this button to start scanning.
Basic Features Screen for USB Scanning
Send Settings
The original is scanned based on the settings specied her
e.
<Reset>
Y
ou can collectively restore the default settings.
<Start>
Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts
color scanning.
Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File Saving
E-Mail Sending
I-Fax Sending
File Saving
<Specify Destination> tab
Select this tab to sear
ch for a destination in the Address Book or an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or
specify a destination using the recall settings.
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 288)
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 310)
<Send Settings> tab
Select this tab to specify the scanning settings.
Scanning
279
<Conrm Destination>
Y
ou can check or change the name and address of the specied destination as well as the number of
destinations.
<Reset>
Y
ou can collectively restore the default settings.
<Start>
Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts
color scanning.
Scanning
280
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals
1W2X-05F
This section describes the basic pr
ocedures for scanning originals.
Scanning
Scanning and Saving to a
Computer(P
. 282)
Saving Data to a USB Memory
De
vice(P. 284)
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving
Data to a Shar
ed Folder or FTP
Server(P. 288)
Oper
ating Jobs
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 298)
Scanning
281
Scanning and Saving to a Computer
1W2X-05H
The sequence of "
scanning an original and saving it to a computer" can only be done when scanning from the
machine. Scan while specifying what computer originals will be saved to; whether to scan originals in color or black
and white; whether to save originals as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings. Incidentally, if you want to specify a
computer connected to the network as the destination, you must register the machine with the computer in advance
(
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 85) ).
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <Computer> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic Features
Scr
een(P. 278)
If only a computer connected to the machine via USB is used, pr
oceed to step 5.
4
Select the destination computer.
5
Select the scan type in the Computer Scan Basic Features screen.
Basic Features
Scr
een for Computer Scanning(P. 278)
The scan types and settings that ar
e displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For
more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
If
you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
6
Select <Start>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
Y
ou cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close
the screen before scanning.
Scanning
282
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
select <Scan Ne
xt>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Finish>.
The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
About the save destination folder
By default, the scanned data is saved to the My Documents folder. A subfolder named with the scanning
date is cr
eated, and the data is saved to that folder.
You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on
MF Scan Utility.
Scanning
283
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
1W2X-05J
This section describes ho
w to scan the original and save the scanned data to a USB memory device.
Befor
e saving data to a USB memory device, insert a USB memory device into the USB port. For information
about the available USB memory devices and how to insert and remove a USB memory device, see
Insert
a USB Memory De
vice(P. 107) .
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <USB Memory> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic Features
Scr
een(P. 278)
4
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
Selecting a File Format
Specifying Orientation of Your Original
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
You can specify the scanning size of your original.
<Scan Size> Select the original size
Scanning
284
Selecting a File Format
You can select the le format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF.
For PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format
that enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical
character recognition). You can also create a PDF le with enhanced security by
encrypting data or adding the signature. Enhancing the Security of
Electronic Files(P. 306)
<File Format> Select a le format
If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original fr
om the platen glass, you can only scan
one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is
saved as a separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the
platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single le or each
page as a separate le can be specied in
Dividing a PDF File by Page(P. 285) or Dividing a TIFF
File b
y Page(P. 285) .
<PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more
than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The le will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the
number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.
In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can congure the settings so that the machine
automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by
the OCR function.
<OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>(P. 489)
Dividing a PDF File b
y Page
Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF le or create a separate PDF le for
each page. This setting can be congured for each PDF format.
<File Format> <Set PDF Details> Select the PDF format <Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or
<On>
Dividing a TIFF File by Page
Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF le or create a separate TIFF le
for each page.
<File Format> <Set TIFF Details> <Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or <On>
Scanning
285
Specifying Orientation of Your Original
You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.
<Orig. Orientation> Select the original orientation
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the
feeder.
The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals ar
e placed on the platen
glass.
<2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for originals whose images on the fr
ont and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
For
information about other scan settings, see
Scanning Clearly(P. 300)
or
Adjusting Balance
between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size)
(P. 309) .
5
Select <Start>.
Scanning of the original starts.
Scanning
286
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the saving pr
ocess starts.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
select <Scan Next>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Finish>.
The saving process starts.
A
new folder is created on the USB memory device, and the scanned document is stored in that folder. The
le name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: the characters
SCAN followed by a four-digit number.le extension name.
If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
If you want to r
egister a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P
. 173)
Scanning
287
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder
or FTP Server
1W2X-05K
This section describes the pr
ocedures for scanning originals and sending the scanned data directly from the machine
by attaching it to an e-mail or saving it to a shared folder or FTP server.
Befor
e you can send the data directly by e-mail, you need to complete certain procedures, such as specifying
the e-mail server settings.
Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax(P. 86)
Befor
e you can save the data to a shared folder or FTP server, you need to complete certain procedures,
such as specifying the location to save the scanned originals to.
Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 94)
Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)
1
Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <E-Mail> or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic Features
Scr
een(P. 278)
4
Specify the destination.
Specifying from Address Book
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
Specifying from Address Book
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of
r
egistered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient
names.
Y
ou need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering
Destinations
(P. 181)
Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Scanning
288
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
1
Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select <To>.
3
Select an index.
Index(P. 181)
4
Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.
If a destination is selected fr
om <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Basic Features screen for e-mail
sending or le saving can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.
Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address
Book. Y
ou can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.
To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
1
Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Select <To>.
Scanning
289
3
Enter a three-digit number.
If you have enter
ed an incorrect value, use
to clear it.
If a conrmation scr
een appears
When <Conrm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and
the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are
shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination,
select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number.
Displaying Destinations in
Addr
ess Book(P. 404)
Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)
For a destination that is not r
egistered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an e-mail address.
1
Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2
Enter the e-mail address, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
If your oce has an LD
AP server installed, you can specify a destination using user
information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the
appropriate user information and specify it as destination.
Y
ou need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand.
Registering LDAP
Servers
(P. 64)
1
Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
Scanning
290
2
Select the LDAP server you are using.
3
Select conditions for user information to be searched.
Name, fax numbers, e-mail addr
esses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for
searching destinations.
4
Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 132) .
To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Select <Search Method>.
6
Select conditions to display the search result.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Sear
ches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specied in steps 3 and 4.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
If users that meet even one of the criteria specied in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7
Select <Start Search>.
The users meeting your sear
ch criteria are displayed.
If
the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine
and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
8
Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select
<Apply>.
Scanning
291
If a screen on which a destination is already specied appears
Y
ou can only send to destinations that are not restricted. To send to other destinations, you must
congure the send function authentication settings in such a way that transmission is not restricted.
Contact your administrator for details.
LDAP Server Authentication(P. 361)
Specifying destinations fr
om the transmission records
You can also recall previously used destinations.
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/
Saving (Recall Settings)(P
. 310)
Saving the data to a shared folder or FTP server
Only one destination can be specied.
5
When sending an e-mail, specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations,
as necessary
.
Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the
destination.
If you selected <LD
AP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specied in the <To>
eld.
<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary
.
1
Select <Conrm Destination>.
2
Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
If you select Gr
oup, select <Details>
<Destination>; you can view the destinations registered in the
gr
oup.
3
Select <Yes>.
6
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
Selecting a File Format
Specifying Orientation of Your Original
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
Scanning
292
Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
You can specify the scanning size of your original.
Select <Scan Size> in the <Send Settings> tab Select the original size
Selecting a File Format
You can select the le format to which originals ar
e scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For
PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format that
enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical character
recognition). You can also create a PDF le with enhanced security by encrypting
data or adding the signature.
Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files(P. 306)
Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab Select a le format
If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original fr
om the platen glass, you can only scan
one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is
saved as a separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the
platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single le or each
page as a separate le can be specied in
Dividing a PDF File by Page(P. 293) or Dividing a TIFF
File b
y Page(P. 294) .
<PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more
than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The le will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the
number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.
In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can congure the settings so that the machine
automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by
the OCR function.
<OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>(P. 489)
Dividing a PDF File b
y Page
Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF le or create a separate PDF le for
each page. This setting can be congured for each PDF format.
Scanning
293
Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details> Select the PDF format
<Divide into Pages> Select <Off> or <On>
Dividing a TIFF File b
y Page
Specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF le or create a separate TIFF le
for each page.
Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set TIFF Details> <Divide into Pages> Select
<Off> or <On>
Specifying Orientation of Your Original
You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.
Select <Orig. Orientation> in the <Send Settings> tab Select the original orientation
Scanning 2-Sided Originals
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the
feeder.
The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen
glass.
Select <2-Sided Original> in the <Send Settings> tab Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>
Scanning
294
<Book Type>
Select for originals whose images on the fr
ont and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
For
information about other scan settings, see
Scanning Clearly(P. 300)
or
Adjusting Balance
between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size)
(P. 309) .
For e-mail, you can specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority as necessary.
Specifying
E-Mail Settings(P
. 313)
7
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
select <Scan Ne
xt>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Start Sending>.
The sending/saving process starts.
If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears
Enter the user name and passwor
d, and select <Apply>.
File name of the sent document
The le name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication
management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension
name.
Scanning
295
If an E-Mail Send Error Occurs
Error notications ar
e sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may
result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that
you clear the mailbox periodically.
To clear the mailbox
When
the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail
account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [TX Settings] [Network Settings - E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4
Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5
Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
E-mail is deleted fr
om the mailbox.
If you always want to scan with the same settings:
Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
If you want to r
egister a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P
. 173)
Scanning
296
Canceling Sending Documents
1W2X-05L
If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or pr
ess
. You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.
Select <Cancel> to cancel
Pr
ess
to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select
<Cancel> <Yes>.
Check the transmission status before canceling
<Status Monitor> <TX Job> Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab <Cancel> <Yes>
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 298)
Scanning
297
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals
1W2X-05R
Y
ou can check the status and log for scanned originals sent directly from the machine.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. <Display Job
Log>
(P. 568)
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <TX Job>.
3
Check the statuses and logs for sent documents.
To check the statuses for sent documents
1
Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> tab.
Displays detailed information about the document.
If
you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the
screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Destination>.
To check the logs for sent documents
1
Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> tab.
<OK> is displayed when a document was sent successfully
, and <Error> is displayed when a document
failed to be sent because it was canceled or there was some error.
Displays detailed information about the document.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
Scanning
298
This number r
epresents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 610)
Scanning
299
Scanning Clearly
1W2X-05S
When cr
eating les for brochures that contain many pictures or reports written in pencil, you can adjust density and
brightness to achieve clearer image quality.
Adjusting Image Quality(P. 301) Adjusting Density(P. 302) Adjusting Sharpness When
Scanning (Sharpness)(P
. 303)
Scanning
300
Adjusting Image Quality
1W2X-05U
You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the original type, such as
te
xt-only originals, originals with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
<Scan> <USB Memory> <Original Type> Select the original type.
Sending Data b
y E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server
<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Original Type> in the <Send
Settings> tab Select the original type
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Scanning
301
Adjusting Density
1W2X-05W
You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a original are too light
or dark.
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
<Scan> <USB Memory> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
Sending Data b
y E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server
<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Density> in the <Send Settings>
tab Adjust the density <Apply>
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)(P. 303)
Scanning
302
Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)
1W2X-05X
You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurr
ed text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos.
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
<Scan> <USB Memory> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
Sending Data b
y E-Mail/I-Fax or Saving Data to the Server
<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> Select <Sharpness> in the <Send
Settings> tab Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
Example: If you want to sharpen te
xt and lines written in pencil
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
Scanning
303
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Adjusting Density(P. 302)
Scanning
304
Useful Scanning Functions
1W2X-05Y
The machine is equipped with useful functions such as those that can cr
eate secure PDF les to prevent them from
being tampered with, and that can send data again to previously specied destinations.
Enhancing the Security of
Electr
onic Files(P. 306)
Adjusting Balance between File
Size and Image Quality (Data Size)
(P
. 309)
Recalling Previously Used
Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall
Settings)(P
. 310)
Specifying E-Mail Settings(P. 313)
Scanning
305
Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files
1W2X-060
Digital les ar
e vulnerable in terms of security because they can be easily viewed or
tampered with leaving no trace. When scanning important documents, you can take
appropriate measures such as encrypting data and adding a device signature to
enhance security.
Encrypting a PDF File(P. 306)
Adding a Device Signature(P. 307)
Encryption and de
vice signature are only available for PDF les.
Both the encryption and device signature can be used at the same time.
Encrypting a PDF File
Y
ou can encrypt and send/save a PDF le by setting a password when scanning originals. The password setting helps
reduce the risk of the PDF le being viewed or edited by others.
1
Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
2
Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan
Basic Featur
es Screen(P. 278)
If you select <USB Memory>, pr
oceed to step 4.
3
Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Basic
Oper
ations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
4
Proceed to <Set PDF Details>.
Saving data to a USB memory device
Select <File Format>
<Set PDF Details>.
Sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server
Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details>.
5
Select the type of PDF format.
Y
ou can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.
Scanning
306
6
Select <Encryption>.
7
Select the encryption level.
<Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
Encrypt the le in the 128-bit envir
onment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later.
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
Encrypt the le in the 256-bit environment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 10.0.
<Acr
obat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> can be changed to <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> with a
different compatible version.
<256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt. PDF)>(P. 489)
8
Enter the encryption password, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
9
Enter the same password, and select <Apply>.
10
Select <Apply>.
Adding a Device Signature
Convert the scanned original into a PDF le with a de
vice signature. The device signature serves the same purpose as
sealing or signing a document; it can be used to check where the le was created and whether the document has been
tampered with or falsied after the signature was appended. To assign the device signature to a PDF le, you need to
generate the key and certicate for the device signature in advance.
Generating a Device Signature Key(P. 414)
1
Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
2
Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan
Basic Featur
es Screen(P. 278)
If you select <USB Memory>, pr
oceed to step 4.
Scanning
307
3
Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Basic
Oper
ations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
4
Proceed to <Set PDF Details>.
Saving data to a USB memory device
Select <File Format> <Set PDF Details>.
Sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server
Select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab <Set PDF Details>.
5
Select the type of PDF format.
You can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.
6
Select <Digital Signatures>.
7
Select <Top Left>.
8
Select <Apply>.
Scanning
308
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality
(Data Size)
1W2X-061
You can specify the le compr
ession ratio when converting scanned originals into
the JPEG format. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than
normal to create smaller les with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large:
Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal larger les
with higher image quality.
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
<Scan> <USB Memory> <Data Size> Specify the setting
Sending Data b
y E-Mail or Saving Data to the Server
<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<File> Select <Data Size> in the <Send Settings> tab
Specify the setting
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Scanning
309
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving
(Recall Settings)
1W2X-062
You can select a destination from among the past destinations. When you specify a
pr
eviously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings such as
density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.
When <Restrict Resending fr
om Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature.
Disabling Use of
Pr
eviously Used Destinations(P. 404)
Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and
disables this feature.
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P
. 404)
When you specify a destination using this featur
e, any destinations that you have already specied are
deleted.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134)
3
Select <E-Mail>, <I-Fax>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic
Featur
es Screen(P. 278)
4
Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
5
Select the destination.
When you tr
ansmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed
in the log, but all the destinations are specied.
Scanning
310
The selected destination and its scan settings ar
e specied. You can also change the settings before
sending.
To delete destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary
.
1
Select <Conrm Destination>.
2
Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
If you select the Gr
oup check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting
<Details>
<Destination>.
3
Select <Yes>.
6
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
select <Scan Ne
xt>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Start Sending>.
The sending/saving process starts.
If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears
Enter the user name and passwor
d, and select <Apply>.
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Scanning
311
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Scanning
312
Specifying E-Mail Settings
1W2X-063
When attaching a scanned originals to an e-mail, you can specify the subject,
message, r
eply-to address, and priority for the e-mail before sending it.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
If the login scr
een appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
Logging
in to Authorized Send(P
. 134) .
3
Select <E-Mail> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
Scan Basic Features
Scr
een(P. 278)
4
Specify the destination, and congur
e the scan settings as necessary.
Basic
Oper
ations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
5
Specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail.
To specify subject/message
1
Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2
Select <Subject>.
3
Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
4
Select <Message>.
5
Enter the message, and select <Apply>.
6
Select <Apply>.
To specify reply-to address
Specify the r
eply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of
the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the
Scanning
313
Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see
Registering Destinations(P. 181) .
1
Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2
Select <Specify from Address Book>.
3
Select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>.
To specify priority
1
Select <Priority> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2
Select a priority level.
6
Select <Start>.
If the <Conrm Destination> scr
een is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select
<Start Scanning>.
Scanning of the original starts.
If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 297)
When placing originals in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the e-mails ar
e sent.
When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
select <Scan Ne
xt>.
Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Start Sending>.
The e-mails are sent.
If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears
Enter the user name and passwor
d, and select <Apply>.
If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
If you want to r
egister a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used
Settings(P
. 173)
If you want to specify the e-mail sender name:
<Register Unit Name>(P. 538)
Scanning
314
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 298)
Scanning
315
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)
1W2X-064
T
o scan from a computer, you can use MF Scan Utility or an application such as an image processing or word
processing application. If you use ScanGear MF supplied with the machine, you can congure advanced scan settings
(
Using ScanGear MF(P. 319) ).
When using the machine with a USB connection, e
xit sleep mode before scanning.
Entering Sleep
Mode
(P. 179)
Scanning Using MF Scan Utility
MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan
documents or images to a computer. Y
ou can forward the scanned data to a specied
application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions]
on MF Scan Utility.
If you ar
e a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
Scanning Using an Application
You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or
image-pr
ocessing application, and load the images directly into the application.
You do not need to start another application to scan.
Scanning Documents
fr
om an Application(P. 317)
Scanning
316
Scanning Documents from an Application
1W2X-065
You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-
pr
ocessing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application,
allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure
varies depending on the application.
The application must be compatible with TW
AIN or WIA
*
. For more information, see the instruction manual
for your application.
*
TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an
integrated standard in Windows.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 136)
The
second or subsequent originals may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed
depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one original at a time.
When <Auto Online> is set to <Off>, you must select <Scan>
<Remote Scanner> in the Home screen to
bring the machine online. <Auto Online>(P. 487)
2
From the application, select the start scan command.
The pr
ocedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more
information, see the instruction manual for your application.
3
Select the scanner driver for this machine.
Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF
, you can congure advanced scan settings.
4
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5
Click [Scan].
Scanning of the original starts.
When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwar
ded to an application.
How to use ScanGear MF
Click
on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.
Scanning
317
LINKS
Using ScanGear MF(P. 319)
Scanning
318
Using ScanGear MF
1W2X-066
ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear
MF to congur
e advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of
starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.
Starting from MF Scan Utility
When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click
[Instructions] on MF Scan Utility
.
If you ar
e a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
Starting from an application
To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as
scanner driver. Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 317)
Functions of ScanGear MF
Pr
eviewing the image before scanning
Specifying the scanning area
Adjusting the detailed image quality
How to use ScanGear MF
Click
on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.
Scanning
319
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices ....................................................................................................................
321
Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 322
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 323
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 325
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 329
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 330
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 335
Scanning with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 338
Faxing with AirPrint ...................................................................................................................................... 340
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 342
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 343
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 345
Linking with Mobile Devices
320
Linking with Mobile Devices
1W2X-067
Linking the machine with mobile de
vices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile
devices via remote control to conrm printing status and change the settings of the machine.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 322)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 329)
Using AirPrint(P. 330)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 345)
Depending on your mobile de
vice, the machine may not operate correctly.
Linking with Mobile Devices
321
Connecting with Mobile Devices
1W2X-068
Ther
e are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and
communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the
communication environment and the device you are using. Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile
Portal> (
Home Screen(P. 123) ).
Connecting via a Wir
eless LAN Router
Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 323)
Connecting Dir
ectly
Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately
connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment.
Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)(P
. 325)
Linking with Mobile Devices
322
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
1W2X-069
If a wir
eless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication
with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to
connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN.
Setting Up the Network
Envir
onment(P. 14)
T
o perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Select <LAN Connection> and pr
oceed with the procedure, if the <Direct Connection> screen is displayed
after <Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.
For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <QR Code>.
3
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device. Utilizing the Machine through
Applications
(P. 329)
4
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
Linking with Mobile Devices
323
Connecting Using the NFC (Andr
oid)
Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.
<Use NFC>(P. 568)
1
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications
(P. 329)
2
Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
3
Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.
Operation
Panel(P
. 115)
Linking with Mobile Devices
324
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
1W2X-06A
Even in an envir
onment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile
device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without dicult
settings.
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
Connecting Directly(P. 326)
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.
Check the network settings of the machine.
Set the IPv4 addr
ess.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
Preparing the mobile device
Congur
e settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
Put the machine into the connection standby status.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> set
<Use Dir
ect Connection> to <On>.
Specifying the value for time until auto termination
Y
ou can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.
<Direct Connection Termination>(P. 453)
Connecting multiple mobile de
vices at the same time
Congure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Access Point Mode Settings>(P. 453)
Linking with Mobile Devices
325
Canon PRINT Business
For information about the oper
ating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
Connecting Directly
It may tak
e time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
When any mobile de
vice is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Congure the Wi-Fi settings fr
om the mobile device using the SSID and network key
information that appear on the screen.
4
When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect>.
Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
When any mobile de
vice is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Select <QR Code>.
4
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications
(P. 329)
5
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
Linking with Mobile Devices
326
6
When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.
Connecting Using the NFC (Andr
oid)
Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.
<Use NFC>(P. 568)
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
When any mobile de
vice is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications
(P. 329)
4
Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
5
Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.
Operation
Panel(P
. 115)
6
When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.
Select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen to check the connected mobile device.
While connecting via dir
ect connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
Linking with Mobile Devices
327
If the status without data tr
ansmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
When you nish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
Linking with Mobile Devices
328
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
1W2X-06C
Perform printing and other oper
ations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
Y
ou can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
Printing with Canon Print Service
Y
ou can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
Printing by Mopria
®
The machine also supports Mopria
®
. Using Mopria
®
enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria
®
made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria
®
that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
Conrming Mopria
®
Settings
Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Settings/
Registr
ation]
[Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]
check bo
x is selected
[OK]
Printing with Google Cloud Print
Y
ou can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Linking with Mobile Devices
329
Using AirPrint
1W2X-06E
This section describes the settings r
equired to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.
AirPrint Settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P
. 330)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 333)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 335)
Scanning with AirPrint(P. 338)
Faxing with AirPrint(P. 340)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 342)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
If you ar
e using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3
Select [Network Settings]
[AirPrint Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
Linking with Mobile Devices
330
5
Specify the required settings.
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check bo
x to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]
Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (
Conguring DNS(P
. 56) ), the registered name is displayed.
[Location]
Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings]
([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.
[Latitude]
Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
[Longitude]
Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.
6
Click [OK].
If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.
Use HT
TP
IPP Print Settings
IPv4 Use mDNS
IPv6 Use mDNS
Use Network Link Scan
If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any mor
e from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (
Conguring DNS
(P. 56) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.
Linking with Mobile Devices
331
Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you ar
e not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the
necessary setting using the operation panel.
Changing Print and Fax Settings
To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the Function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing and fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> Set <Use
IPP Printing> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>
Changing the TLS Setting
Y
ou can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or sending faxes with
AirPrint. The factory default setting is <Off>.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> Set <Use
TLS> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>
Changing the Scan Setting
Congure the scan setting using AirPrint.
Set the Function to Enable or Disable
Y
ou can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings>
Set <Use Network Link Scan> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>
Change TLS Settings
Y
ou can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory
default setting is <Off>.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings>
Set <Use TLS> to <Off> or <On> <Apply>
Linking with Mobile Devices
332
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function
settings.
1
Select [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac
you ar
e using.
If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
2
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3
Click [Options & Supplies].
4
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
5
Log in to the Remote UI.
T
o change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.
AirPrint-Dedicated Page
When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.
Linking with Mobile Devices
333
[AirPrint Settings]
Enables you to check the values enter
ed in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the
machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
[Other Settings]
[Print Security Settings]
Congur
e the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
[Scan Security Settings]
Congure the scan security settings using TLS.
[TLS Settings]
Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS.
Conguring the Key and Certicate for
TLS(P. 377)
[Key and Certicate Settings]
Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued.
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
[Consumables Information]
Enables you to check the information of each paper sour
ce and consumables of the machine and the device
version.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Linking with Mobile Devices
334
Printing with AirPrint
1W2X-06F
Y
ou can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 335)
Printing from a Mac(P. 336)
System Requir
ements
One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.
iPad (all models)
iPhone (3GS or later)
iPod touch (3r
d generation or later)
Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)
*
*
OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection
Network Environment
One of the following environments is required.
An envir
onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
For printing, it is r
equired to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.
Changing the Setting of Functions
Available with AirPrint(P
. 332)
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
For ho
w to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .
For information on the Dir
ect Connection, see
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325) .
2
From the application on your Apple device, tap
to display the menu options.
Linking with Mobile Devices
335
3
Tap [Print].
4
Select this machine from [Printer].
The printers connected to the network ar
e displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
The
screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support
AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar
e using.
6
Tap [Print].
Printing starts.
Checking the print status
During printing, pr
ess the Home button of the Apple device twice
tap [Print].
Printing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
For ho
w to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .
2
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
Ho
w to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual or Help for the application you are using.
4
Select the machine in the print dialog box.
The printers connected to the Mac ar
e displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Linking with Mobile Devices
336
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar
e using.
6
Click [Print].
Printing starts.
Linking with Mobile Devices
337
Scanning with AirPrint
1W2X-06H
Y
ou can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.
System Requirements
To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with
OS X 10.11 or later installed.
Network Envir
onment
One of the following environments is required.
An envir
onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
For scanning, it is r
equired to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>.
Changing the Setting of Functions
Available with AirPrint(P
. 332)
Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function (
<Auto
Online>(P
. 487) ) is set to <Off>, rst put the machine into online state by selecting <Scan>
<Remote
Scanner>, then start the pr
ocedure for scanning.
You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any
operation whatsoever.
Scanning from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .
2
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
3
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
4
Click [Scan].
Linking with Mobile Devices
338
5
Click [Open Scanner].
The [Scanner] scr
een is displayed.
6
Congure the scan settings as necessary
.
7
Click [Scan].
The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.
Linking with Mobile Devices
339
Faxing with AirPrint
1W2X-06J
Y
ou can send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.
System Requirements
To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.
Network Envir
onment
One of the following environments is required.
An envir
onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
For faxing, it is r
equired to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.
Changing the Setting of Functions
Available with AirPrint(P
. 332)
Faxing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
For ho
w to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .
2
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
Ho
w to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4
Select this machine in the print dialog box.
The printers connected to the Mac ar
e displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.
5
Specify the destination.
Linking with Mobile Devices
340
6
Click [Fax].
Fax sending starts.
Linking with Mobile Devices
341
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
1W2X-06K
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the follo
wing solutions.
Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
Make sure that the machine is congured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department
ID and password are entered.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357)
For
printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sucient amount
remaining in the toner cartridges.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 333)
For
scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>.
Changing the Setting of
Functions Available with AirPrint
(P. 332)
Linking with Mobile Devices
342
Using Google Cloud Print
1W2X-06L
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print fr
om a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 343)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
An envir
onment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and
when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding
internet connection.
Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.
Google Cloud Print does not support printing from an IPv6 address.
A Google account is r
equired to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on
the Google website.
Checking the Settings of the Machine
Check the follo
wing before conguring cloud printing.
Make sure that the IPv4 address is specied for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with
computers on a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Check whether the date and time of the machine ar
e specied correctly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 12)
If
Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department
ID or PIN.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print fr
om anywhere using the service.
Linking with Mobile Devices
343
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator. Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
4
Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box [OK].
6
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
Re-Registering the Machine
T
o re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.
7
Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].
8
Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.
Printing can no
w be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud
Print home page.
Conguring Settings on the Oper
ation Panel
You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Google Cloud
Print Settings>(P
. 463)
Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome
You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration.
For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.
Linking with Mobile Devices
344
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
1W2X-06R
Y
ou can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can conrm the machine status or
perform various settings from a mobile device.
Supported Web Browsers
Web browsers supporting the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.
Andr
oid OS
Chrome
iOS
Safari
Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices
Enter the IP addr
ess of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, conrm the IP
address set for the machine (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ). If it is unkno
wn, ask your network administrator.
1
Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.
If you want to use an IPv6 addr
ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.
Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
For
a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to
conrm all of the items, see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 415)
Linking with Mobile Devices
345
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ...............................................................................................................................
348
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 350
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................... 351
Setting the Department ID Management ..................................................................................................... 353
Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 359
LDAP Server Authentication .......................................................................................................................... 361
Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 365
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 367
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 368
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 371
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 374
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 375
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 377
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 380
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 383
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 386
Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 388
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 395
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 399
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions ......................................................................... 401
Restricting Use of the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 402
Limiting Available Destinations .............................................................................................................. 404
Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ................................................................................................... 406
Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 408
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 409
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 411
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 412
Increasing the Security of Documents ............................................................................................................. 413
Generating a Device Signature Key ............................................................................................................... 414
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 415
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 416
Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 419
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 424
Registering Destinations from Remote UI .................................................................................................... 427
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 431
Managing the Machine
346
Updating the Firmware .....................................................................................................................................
434
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 436
Managing the Machine
347
Managing the Machine
1W2X-06S
T
o reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or
unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should
manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.
Conguring the Basic Management System
Setting Access Privileges(P. 350) Conguring the Network Security Settings(P
. 365)
Pr
eparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 399) Increasing the Security of Documents(P. 413)
Ensuring Effective Management
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 415)
Managing the Machine
348
Managing the System Congur
ation and Settings
Updating the Firmware(P. 434) Initializing Settings(P. 436)
Managing the Machine
349
Setting Access Privileges
1W2X-06U
Pr
otect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are
set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
Set up an account with full access privileges called "System Manager ID" for a system manager. Registering an account
called "Department ID" allo
ws you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this
machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI
Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager ID
System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to
log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in or
der to access items that requires
administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and
register the System Manager ID. Otherwise, anyone will be able to change the machine settings. Only one
System Manager ID can be registered.
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
Department ID (Department ID Management)
You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register
multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to oper
ate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login
screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information
such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled.
Setting the
Department ID Management
(P. 353)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a
Remote UI PIN
(P. 359)
Authentication Settings for Send Function (Authorized Send)
If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can set LDAP server authentication to be carried out when the
fax or scan function is used. LDAP Server Authentication(P. 361)
Managing the Machine
350
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN
1W2X-06W
Set the system manager account, "System Manager ID
." You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the
System Manager ID is specied, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network>
and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System
Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know
the System Manager ID and PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Management Settings>.
If the System Manager ID has already been set
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <User Management> <System Manager Information Settings>.
4
Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.
5
Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.
Specify the <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.
Enter numbers for each item, and select <Apply>.
The Conrm scr
een is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.
Y
ou cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in
and select
<Apply> with the elds blank.
Setting the System Manager Name
1
Select <System Manager Name>.
2
Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.
On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 132) .
Managing the Machine
351
Do not for
get your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help
line.
Conguring settings via the Remote UI
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registr
ation]
[User Management]
[System Manager Information] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
By using the Remote UI, you can r
egister a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI.
Checking System Manager Information(P. 421)
Logging in to the machine
If you try to access items that r
equire administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management
Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specied, the Login screen is displayed.
Logging in to the
Machine(P
. 134)
You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager
Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 350)
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Managing the Machine
352
Setting the Department ID Management
1W2X-06X
Y
ou can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as
printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as
necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. When you want to enable Department ID
Management for jobs from a computer, you need to congure additional settings on the computer side.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 353)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 355)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 356)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357)
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].
4
Register or edit Department IDs.
Registering a Department ID
1
Click [Register New Department].
2
Specify the required settings.
Managing the Machine
353
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number to be r
egistered.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text boxes.
[Restrict Functions]
You can restrict the number of pages to print and the available functions for departments to be
registered. To restrict the number of pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter
the appropriate number of pages in [Number of Pages]. Select the check box for the target functions to
restrict functions.
If the [Restrict Scan] check bo
x is selected, the Save to USB Memory Device, Send E-mail, and Save to
Shared Folder or FTP Server functions are all restricted. You can also restrict other methods that scan
documents by importing them to a computer, but in that case you cannot block access for each
Department ID (
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357) ).
3
Click [OK].
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1
Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2
Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].
[Department ID Page Total]
Y
ou can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.
Managing the Machine
354
If you want to r
eturn the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click
[Clear Count]
[OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]
[OK].
Using control cards
When the optional Cop
y Card Reader-F is attached to the machine, Department IDs will be registered
automatically.
Do not delete the registered department IDs. The control cards that correspond to the deleted department
IDs will become unavailable.
You cannot use [Restrict Functions] to restrict the allowable number of pages to print.
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you r
egister as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [User Management]
[Department ID Management].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Department ID Management] check box.
[Department ID Management]
Managing the Machine
355
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check bo
x.
For
information about the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow
Black & White Copy Jobs] check boxes, see
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357) .
6
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also switch Department ID Management On/Off from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Department
ID Management>(P
. 566)
Logging in to the machine
When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is
displayed.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer
When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs fr
om a computer, you need to specify the department
ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer.
T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
Click the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Enable the Department ID Management function.
Printer driver
Select the [Use Department ID Management] check bo
x.
Fax driver
Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].
5
Click [Settings] found to the right.
Managing the Machine
356
6
Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check bo
x to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number.
[PIN]
Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the
computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes]
Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from
a computer.
[Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing]
Select the check box to send black and white print data as an unknown ID job.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
7
Click [OK].
Logging in to the machine
When you try to send job fr
om a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Conrm
Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes] check box is cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
If you do not change the default settings, any user can print fr
om a computer, scan (via <Computer> and <Remote
Scanner>), send a PC fax from a computer, or make black and white copies without entering an ID and PIN even when
Department ID Management is enabled for the machine. You can change the default settings so that the machine
cannot be used for these functions without a correct ID and PIN.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
Managing the Machine
357
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Clear the check boxes as necessary.
[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]
In or
der to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the
correct ID and PIN (
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 356) ).
Ho
wever, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not
entered. When you want to congure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID
and PIN are entered, clear the check box.
[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]
If the check box is selected, you can select <Computer> or <Remote Scanner> on the main screen and scan
documents into a computer anytime. If the check box is cleared, you cannot scan documents into a computer
if Department ID Management is enabled. It is not possible to restrict scanning of documents into a
computer for individual department IDs.
[Allow Black & White Copy Jobs]
If the check box is selected when Department ID Management is enabled, you can copy in black and white
without entering the correct ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering an ID and PIN.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 350)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
Managing the Machine
358
Setting a Remote UI PIN
1W2X-06Y
Y
ou can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
When Department ID Management is enabled, setting her
e is not required.
Setting the Department ID
Management(P
. 353)
For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [License/Other] [Remote UI Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text
boxes.
6
Click [OK].
Managing the Machine
359
Using the operation panel
Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed fr
om <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Remote UI
Settings>(P
. 571)
If <Management Settings> are initialized
The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN.
<Initialize
Menu>(P
. 574)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 350)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
Managing the Machine
360
LDAP Server Authentication
1W2X-070
If your system has an LD
AP server installed, you can ensure that LDAP server authentication is carried out when the
send function is used. This enables you to prevent unauthorized use by third parties and information disclosure. Once
the authorization settings are enabled, the Authorized Send screen appears when the fax or scan function is used and
operation can only continue if it is correctly authorized by the LDAP server. Use the settings described here to
congure LDAP server authentication. For more information about registering the server to be used for
authentication, see
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64) .
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [TX Settings] [Authentication Settings for Send Function].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use User Authentication] check box and select whether a conrmation
scr
een is displayed at logout.
[Use User Authentication]
Select the check box to display the Authorized Send login screen when the fax or scan function is used (LDAP
server authentication).
[Display Conrmation Screen When Logging Out]
Select the check box to display a screen that allows you to selectively log out when you are logged on for
both Authorized Send and Department ID Management. If you clear this check box, no selection screen is
displayed when you log out and you are logged out from both Authorized Send and Department ID
Management.
Managing the Machine
361
6
Congure the settings for sending e-mail/I-Fax
es.
[E-Mail/I-Fax Sending]
Select whether to allo
w sending e-mail and I-Faxes.
[Do Not Allow] Blocks sending e-mail and I-Faxes. <E-Mail> and <I-Fax> in the scan function can no
longer be used.
[Allow] Permits outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes.
[Only Allow Sending to Myself] Blocks all outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes other than those to users with authorized e-
mail addr
esses. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the
LDAP server.
[Authentication Method]
When [Allo
w] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending], this allows you to specify
whether an authentication screen is shown on the SMTP server when e-mail is sent.
[Display the authentication screen using the same
user name as when the sending oper
ation started]
Displays the authentication screen showing the same user
name and password entered in the Authorized Send login
screen.
[Display the authentication screen without any
authentication information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and
password elds blank.
[Use device-specic authentication information and
do not display the authentication screen]
No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail or I-Faxes are
sent. Authorization on the SMTP server is carried out using the
user name and password set in [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings]
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90) .
[Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender]
Select the check bo
x when the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender. The e-mail
addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server. If you clear this check box, the e-mail
address set in the [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] is set as the sender.
7
Congure the le tr
ansfer settings (for saving to shared folders and FTP servers).
Managing the Machine
362
[File Sending]
Select whether to allo
w saving to shared folders and FTP servers.
[Do Not Allow] Blocks saving to shared folders and FTP servers. <File> in the scan
function can no longer be used.
[Allow] Saving to shared folders and FTP servers is not blocked.
[Only Allow Sending to Myself or
Specied Folder]
Blocks all saving to shared folders and FTP servers other than specied
folders. The data is saved to folders r
egistered on the LDAP server or to
the folder specied in [Specify Destination Folder].
When [Allow] is specied in [File Sending]
[Authentication Method]
Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.
[Display the authentication screen using the same
authentication information as when the sending oper
ation
started]
Displays the authentication screen showing the same user
name and password entered in the Authorized Send login
screen.
[Display the authentication screen without any
authentication information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and
password elds blank.
[Use the authentication information from the address book
and do not display the authentication screen]
No authentication screen is displayed when sending.
Authentication is carried out on the server using the user
name and password set in the Address Book.
When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specied Folder] is specied in [File Sending]
[Authentication Method]
Allo
ws you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.
[Use the same authentication information as
when the sending oper
ation started]
Carries out authorization on the server using the user name and
password entered in the Authorized Send login screen. Selecting the
[Display Authentication Screen] check box displays the authentication
screen with this user name and password already entered when you
send the data.
[Display the authentication screen without any
authentication information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password
elds blank.
Managing the Machine
363
[Specify Destination Folder]
Selecting this check bo
x allows you to specify the folder where the data is saved. If the check box is not selected,
the save destination is set based on authorized user information registered on the LDAP server.
[Host Name] Enter a host name for the shared folder or FTP server.
[Folder Path]
Enter a path name for the save destination folder (excluding the host name). When the [Add
User Name] check bo
x is selected, the user name used for authentication on the LDAP
server is added to the path.
8
Congure the settings for sending fax
es.
[Fax Sending]
Select whether to allo
w sending faxes. [Do Not Allow] prevents the user from sending faxes from the
machine.
9
Click [OK].
LINKS
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
Managing the Machine
364
Conguring the Network Security Settings
1W2X-071
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses fr
om attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
Firewall Settings
Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting
communication only to de
vices that have a specic IP address or MAC address.
Restricting Communication
b
y Using Firewalls(P. 367)
Changing Port Numbers
A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are
pr
edetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication
devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374)
Proxy Settings
When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy
server. When the pr
oxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be
expected to be enhanced.
Setting a Proxy(P. 375)
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Managing the Machine
365
IPSec Communication
While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a W
eb browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than TLS.
Conguring IPSec Settings(P
. 388)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a de
vice tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
(P. 395)
Managing the Machine
366
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
1W2X-072
Without pr
oper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 368)
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 371)
Managing the Machine
367
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
1W2X-073
Y
ou can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].
4
Click [Edit] for the target IP address lter.
Select the lter that matches the tar
get IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,
select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet ltering.
Select the default policy to allo
w or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
Managing the Machine
368
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check bo
x to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
de
vices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
2
Specify address exceptions.
Enter the IP addr
ess (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Check for entry errors
If IP addr
esses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 462)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 463)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric char
acters with
colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Specifying a range of addresses with a prex
Enter the address, followed by a slash and
a number indicating the prex length.
192.168.0.32/27
fe80::1234/64
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter
Outgoing multicast and br
oadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
Select an IP address and click [Delete].
Managing the Machine
369
3
Click [OK].
6
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 462)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 463)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 371)
Managing the Machine
370
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
1W2X-074
Y
ou can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC
addresses but permit other communications.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].
4
Click [Edit] for the target MAC address lter.
T
o restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from
a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet ltering.
Select the pr
econdition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
Managing the Machine
371
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check bo
x to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
de
vices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
2
Specify address exceptions.
Enter the MA
C address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
If MA
C addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
<MAC Address
Filter>(P
. 463)
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter
Outgoing multicast and br
oadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
Managing the Machine
372
3
Click [OK].
6
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<MAC Address
Filter>(P
. 463)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 368)
Managing the Machine
373
Changing Port Numbers
1W2X-075
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other de
vices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
T
o change the port number for proxy server, see
Setting a Proxy(P. 375) .
T
o change the port number for LDAP server, see
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64) .
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Preferences>
<Network>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
<Port Number Settings>.
4
Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.
Learning more about the protocols
<LPD>/<RA
W>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41)
<HTTP>
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
<POP3>/<SMTP>
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
<SNMP>
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 69)
<Multicast Disco
very>
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 74)
<FTP> Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location(P. 98)
5
Enter the port number, and select <Apply>.
6
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Managing the Machine
374
Setting a Proxy
1W2X-076
A pr
oxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [Proxy Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Managing the Machine
375
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Pr
oxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Managing the Machine
376
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS
1W2X-077
Y
ou can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/
PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a "key and certicate"
(server certicate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certicate for TLS before
enabling TLS (
Management Functions(P. 715) ).
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].
4
Click [Key and Certicate].
5
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.
Viewing details of a certicate
You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.
6
Select [License/Other]
[Remote UI Settings].
Managing the Machine
377
7
Click [Edit].
8
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Remote
UI>(P
. 571)
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
Using TLS to encrypt e-mail/I-Fax communication
If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these
servers (
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90) ). For more information about the
SMTP server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
Limiting the TLS version
Select [Allowed Versions] on the [TLS Settings] page of Remote UI, and specify the upper limit and lower
limit.
Managing the Machine
378
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 380)
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
(P. 383)
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 386)
Conguring IPSec Settings
(P. 388)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 69)
Registering LDAP Servers(P. 64)
Managing the Machine
379
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network
Communication
1W2X-078
A k
ey and certicate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via
Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certicates
are used with the key and certicate generated in "Network Communication."
If you want to use a server certicate that has a CA signatur
e, you can generate a CSR together with a key
instead of a certicate.
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
(P. 383)
For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key and certicate
Click [Delete] on the right of the k
ey and certicate you want to delete
click [OK].
A
key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key
and certicate before deleting it.
5
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and certicate.
Managing the Machine
380
[Ke
y Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-
down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level
becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.
When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur
e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[V
alidity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
Managing the Machine
381
7
Click [OK].
Gener
ating a key and certicate may take some time.
After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
LINKS
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 386)
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Conguring IPSec Settings
(P. 388)
Managing the Machine
382
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
1W2X-079
Because certicates gener
ated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result
depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certicate authority issue the certicate with the CA
signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certicate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from
Remote UI. When the certicate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 383)
Registering a Certicate to a Ke
y(P. 385)
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
Generating a Key and CSR
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Device Management] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key and certicate
Click [Delete] on the right of the k
ey and certicate you want to delete
click [OK].
A
key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certicate before deleting it.
5
Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and CSR.
Managing the Machine
383
[Ke
y Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-
down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.
However, the security is tighter.
When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur
e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] r
adio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
Gener
ating a key and CSR may take some time.
Managing the Machine
384
8
Click [Store in File].
A dialog bo
x for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
The CSR le is stored on the computer.
9
Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority
.
Registering a Certicate to a Ke
y
The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certicate issued from the certicate authority based on the
CSR is registered in the key. Once the certication authority has issued the certicate, register it using the procedure
below.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Device Management]
[Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] r
equired to register the certicate.
5
Click [Register Certicate].
6
Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing r
equest, and click [Register].
LINKS
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 380)
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 386)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 388)
Managing the Machine
385
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network
Communication
1W2X-07A
Y
ou can obtain the key and certicate, and the CA certicate from a certication authority (CA) for use with the
machine. Install and register the obtained key and certicate le and CA certicate le in this machine using Remote
UI. Check the key and certicate, and CA certicate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (
Management Functions(P. 715) ).
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate
Settings].
Click [Ke
y and Certicate Settings] to install a key and certicate, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA
certicate.
4
Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Deleting a registered key and certicate or CA certicate
Click
[Delete] on the right of the key and certicate or CA certicate you want to delete
click
[OK]. You
cannot delete the preinstalled CA certicates.
A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certicate before deleting it.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates
Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.
5
Click [Install].
Managing the Machine
386
Deleting the key and certicate le or CA certicate le
Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].
6
Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
The k
ey and certicate le or the CA certicate le is installed on the machine from a computer.
7
Register the key and certicate or CA certicate.
Registering a key and certicate
1
Click [Register] on the right of the key and certicate le you want to r
egister.
2
Enter the name of the key and password.
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the name of the key to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.
3
Click [OK].
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate le you want to r
egister.
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 380)
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Conguring IPSec Settings
(P. 388)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Managing the Machine
387
Conguring IPSec Settings
1W2X-07C
Internet Pr
otocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check
the system requirements (
Management Functions(P. 715) ) and set the necessary congur
ation on the computer
before you congure the machine.
Using IPSec with IP address lter
IP addr
ess lter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P
. 368)
Conguring IPSec Settings
Befor
e using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists
of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector denes conditions for IP pack
ets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE congur
es the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the
machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method (
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 377) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.
Generate or install the key and certicate beforehand ( Registering the Key and Certicate for Network
Communication
(P. 386) ).
AH/ESP
Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used
at the same time. Y
ou can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
Managing the Machine
388
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [IPSec Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
If you want the machine to only r
eceive packets that match one of the security policies that you dene in the
steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
6
Click [Register New Policy].
7
Specify the Policy Settings.
1
In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the
policy
.
2
Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
8
Specify the Selector Settings.
Managing the Machine
389
[Local Address]
Click the r
adio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[Remote Address]
Click the r
adio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the
other de
vices.
[All IPv6 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the
other devices.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Addr
ess], enter the IP address to
apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.
Entering IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
Managing the Machine
390
Description Example
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric char
acters with colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 addr
ess, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Prex Length]
Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prexes. Enter a
range between 0 and 128 as the prex length.
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio
button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
IPSec is not applied to the following packets
Loopback, multicast, and br
oadcast packets
IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets
9
Specify the IKE Settings.
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the k
ey exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the
aggressive mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to
generate or install the key and certicate before selecting [Digital Signature Method].
Conguring the
Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
[Valid for]
Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]
Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
Managing the Machine
391
[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman gr
oup, which determines the key strength.
Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key
1
Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key
Settings].
2
Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
3
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Authenticating a machine using digital signature method
1
Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and
Certicate].
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.
Viewing details of a certicate
Y
ou can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.
3
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
10
Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check bo
x to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices.
[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]
Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select
either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is
terminated when either of the conditions has been satised.
[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
Managing the Machine
392
[Select Algorithm]
Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check bo
x(es) depending on the IPSec header and the
algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also
select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-
down lists.
[ESP Authentication] To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not
Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to
specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports tr
ansport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
11
Click [OK].
If you need to r
egister an additional security policy, return to step 6.
12
Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
Policies ar
e applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or
down the order.
Editing a policy
Click the corr
esponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.
Deleting a policy
Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete
click [OK].
13
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Managing the Machine
393
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Use
IPSec>
(P. 458)
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
IPSec Policy List(P. 613)
Managing the Machine
394
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
1W2X-07E
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client de
vice. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certicate or
a CA certicate befor
e conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication (
Registering the Key and Certicate for
Network Communication
(P. 386) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other b
y mutually verifying their certicates. A
key and certicate issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when
authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be
used in addition to a CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and passwor
d for the client authentication and a CA certicate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used
with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377) ).
PEAP
The r
equired settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.
Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Conguring the Ke
y and
Certicate for TLS(P. 377) ).
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
Managing the Machine
395
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]
te
xt box.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check bo
x to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6
Congure the r
equired settings according to the specied authentication method.
Setting TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
Y
ou cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use for the client
authentication.
Viewing details of a certicate
Y
ou can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.
Managing the Machine
396
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
Y
ou can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.
2
Click [Change User Name/Password].
T
o specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3
Set the user name/password.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
4
Click [OK].
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Managing the Machine
397
Using the operation panel
Y
ou can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Use IEEE
802.1X>
(P. 462)
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Managing the Machine
398
Restricting the Machine's Functions
1W2X-07F
Some of the functions of the machine may r
arely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions
You can specify the PIN in the Address Book to disable a general user from modifying data or limit destinations
that can be specied for fax sending. Y
ou can also disable a user from collectively sending a fax to multiple
destinations (Sequential Broadcast).
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions(P. 401)
Restricting Printing from a Computer
You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless
the PIN is enter
ed on the machine side.
Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 408)
Restricting USB Functions
The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as
an information leakage. Y
ou can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.
Restricting USB Functions(P. 409)
Disabling HTTP Communication
When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,
you can disable HT
TP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP
Communication(P. 411)
Managing the Machine
399
Disabling Remote Management
When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote
UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 412)
Managing the Machine
400
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending
Functions
1W2X-07H
Some cases of information leakage can be pr
evented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those
registered in the Address Book or LDAP servers, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users
cannot add or edit Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the
machine is set to ask you to enter the fax number twice for conrmation.
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 404)
Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 406)
Managing the Machine
401
Restricting Use of the Address Book
1W2X-07J
The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new
entries to the Addr
ess Book or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address
Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to unintended recipients because
changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Set Destination>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <Address Book PIN>.
4
Specify the PIN.
Enter the number, and select <Apply>.
The Conrm scr
een is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.
Y
ou cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
To cancel the PIN setting, clear the information you entered in
and select <Apply> with the eld blank.
In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following
oper
ations:
Restricting the addition of new destinations, see
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be
Specied(P
. 404) .
Disabling the PC fax function, see
Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 406) .
LINKS
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Managing the Machine
402
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P
. 87)
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Managing the Machine
403
Limiting Available Destinations
1W2X-07K
By limiting destinations that can be specied to those r
egistered in the Address Book
or LDAP servers, you can reduce the possibility of specifying unintended destinations
and prevent users from leaking information. You can congure the setting to display
the conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when specifying a coded
dial number in the Address Book.
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P
. 404)
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 404)
Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 404)
Checking Destinations when Sending Data(P. 405)
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied
Restrict destinations that can be specied when sending fax
es or scanned documents to "those already registered in
the Address Book," "those previously used," or "those searchable from the LDAP servers." When this function is
enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the
Address Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict New
Destinations> <On>
This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing. Restricting Fax Sending from a
Computer(P
. 406)
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
Pr
ohibits the specication of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations
being selected from the transmission records for "Send Fax," "Scan and Send as E-mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared
Folder or FTP Server."
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict Resending from
Log>
<On>
Displaying Destinations in Address Book
When using coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to pr
ecisely remember whose destination (or what
group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers accurately, you may send
your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended recipients by conguring the
Managing the Machine
404
machine to display the details of the coded dial number you selected/entered as a sending destination on the screen
befor
e you send documents to that destination.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Conrm When Coded Dial
TX> <On>
Checking Destinations when Sending Data
You can congure a setting so that the destination conrmation screen is displayed when fax, e-mail, or I-Fax sending
starts. If <Only for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the conrmation screen is displayed only when multiple
destinations are specied.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Conrm Dest. Befor
e
Sending>
Select <On> or <Only for Sequential Broadcast>
LINKS
Sending I-Faxes(P. 246)
Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server(P. 288)
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 310)
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 406)
Managing the Machine
405
Restricting the Fax Sending Functions
1W2X-07L
Y
ou can set various restrictions for sending faxes, which can prevent information leakage to third parties or sending
documents to unintended destinations.
Conrming the Enter
ed Fax Number(P. 406)
Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 406)
Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 406)
Conrming the Entered Fax Number
You can congure the setting to display the conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when entering a
destination fax number using the numeric keys.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Conrm Enter
ed Fax Number>
<On>
Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer
You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Allow Fax Driver TX> <Off>
Restricting Sequential Broadcasts
You can prohibit a function that collectively sends a fax to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Restrict Sequential
Br
oadcast>
<On>
LINKS
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 229)
Managing the Machine
406
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 242)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 356)
Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 402)
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 404)
Managing the Machine
407
Restricting Printing from a Computer
1W2X-07R
Y
ou can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the
Secure Print documents (
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 263) ).
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Secure Print> <Restrict Printer Jobs> <On>
<Apply> Restart the machine
Managing the Machine
408
Restricting USB Functions
1W2X-07S
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripher
al devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This
section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory
devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 409)
Restricting the Scan to USB Function(P. 409)
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 409)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
Y
ou can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the
machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for
attaching USB memory devices.
<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> Select <Off> in <Use as USB
De
vice>
<Apply> Restart the machine
Restricting the Scan to USB Function
You can disable storing scanned original data into a USB memory device.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off>
in <Use Scan Function> <Apply> Restart the machine
Restricting the USB Print Function
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off>
in <Use Print Function> <Apply> Restart the machine
LINKS
Managing the Machine
409
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
Managing the Machine
410
Disabling HTTP Communication
1W2X-07U
HT
TP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
Disabling HT
TP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP> <Off> <Yes>
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 415)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 374)
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Managing the Machine
411
Disabling Remote UI
1W2X-07W
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied b
y using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>
<Remote UI Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Remote UI> <Apply> Restart the
machine
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 415)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
Managing the Machine
412
Increasing the Security of Documents
1W2X-07X
The machine is equipped with security functions designed to pr
event documents from being leaked or tampered with.
Device Signature
The digital signature is added to scanned documents using a key and certicate mechanism in or
der to prove to
the recipient that the document has been created on the machine. The recipient can verify "the device that
created the document" and "whether the document has been tampered with." Before adding a device
signature, you need to generate a key and certicate (device certicate) that is used for the device signature
using the machine.
Generating a Device Signature Key(P. 414)
Managing the Machine
413
Generating a Device Signature Key
1W2X-07Y
Y
ou can generate a key and certicate for the device signature that show a document was scanned on the machine.
The certicate is appended when an document is scanned and converted into a PDF le.
Only one k
ey and certicate for the device signature can be generated. It cannot be deleted.
An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required.
System Options(P. 724)
Ke
y and certicate for the device signature are valid for ve years. Renew them when required.
For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Generate Key].
5
Select the [Device Signature] check box, and click [OK].
A k
ey and certicate for the device signature is generated.
Renewing the Device Signature Key and the Key and Certicate
1
Click [Update] at the right of the key and certicate for the de
vice signature.
2
Click [OK].
Managing the Machine
414
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
1W2X-080
Using a W
eb browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see
System
Envir
onment(P. 718) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Checking the Status and Logs(P. 419)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
Managing the Machine
415
Starting Remote UI
1W2X-081
T
o operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ). If you have any questions,
ask your Network Administr
ator.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and pr
ess the
[ENTER] key.
If you want to use an IPv6 addr
ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
A
security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted (
Conguring
the
Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 377) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3
Log in to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [System Manager Mode] or [Gener
al User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as
necessary.
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID]
and PIN in [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
[Gener
al User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When
you want to check if a specic document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document
of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is
automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login
name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
Managing the Machine
416
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 359)
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appr
opriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN].
Setting the Department ID
Management(P
. 353)
4
Click [Log In].
The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
Remote UI Screen
When you log in to the Remote UI, the follo
wing Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on
the Portal page and the basic operations.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the curr
ent status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
[Consumables Information]
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
Managing the Machine
417
[Support Link]
Displays the support link specied in [Support Link] under [License/Other].
Refresh Icon
Refr
eshes the currently displayed page.
[Language]
Selects the display language used for the Remote UI scr
eens.
[Log Out]
Logs off fr
om the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a windo
w for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]
under [User Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/
history or cancel the pr
ocessing.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registr
ation] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data.
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424)
[Address Book]
Displays the coded dial numbers and the Favorites list r
egistered in the Address Book. You can also register
or edit the Address Book when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
Registering Destinations
fr
om Remote UI(P. 427)
[Application Library]
Displays the Application Libr
ary setting page.
Managing the Machine
418
Checking the Status and Logs
1W2X-082
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 419)
Checking History of Documents(P. 420)
Checking Error Information(P. 420)
Checking Consumables(P. 420)
Checking Device Specications(P
. 421)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 421)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 422)
Checking History of Toner Cartridges(P. 422)
A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
le name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents curr
ently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
Y
ou can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
Regar
dless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and
waiting to be printed will be listed.
If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.
You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Managing the Machine
419
Checking History of Documents
The job logs of print, copy, sending (TX), and receiving (RX) are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
Checking Error Information
When an err
or occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the
Portal page (main page).
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 417) ).
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Consumables]
Managing the Machine
420
Checking Device Specications
The maximum print speed and machine featur
es are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Featur
es]
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. The de
vice name and other system manager
information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management]
page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Managing the Machine
421
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed b
y the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
Checking History of Toner Cartridges
Y
ou can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs. The display can be changed for each color of the
toner cartridge.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 416) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Cartridge
Log]
Managing the Machine
422
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
Managing the Machine
423
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
1W2X-083
Y
ou can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic ow of changing the
settings of the machine using the Remote UI.
Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
Some settings may r
equire operations that differ from the procedure described here.
1
Start the Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Click the setting you want to congur
e in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4
Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
Managing the Machine
424
5
Click [Edit].
6
Specify the required settings.
7
Click [OK].
Managing the Machine
425
8
Restart the machine as necessary.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
For information about whether you need to r
estart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.
Managing the Machine
426
Registering Destinations from Remote UI
1W2X-084
Y
ou can use the computer to register destinations in the Address Book of the machine and edit information of
registered destinations. Specify the shared folder or FTP server destination here.
Y
ou can change the settings only when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
1
Start the Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 416)
2
Click [Address Book] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
If the enter PIN page is displayed
The Addr
ess Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].
3
Click [Coded Dial].
Y
ou can also register destinations in Favorites. In this case, click [Favorites] instead of [Coded Dial].
Favorites(P. 181)
4
Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named "Not
Register
ed."
Y
ou can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].
You can delete a registered destination by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.
If you delete a destination from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings.
Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 173)
5
Select the type of the destination to register, and click [OK].
T
o register the shared folder or FTP server destination, select [File].
Managing the Machine
427
6
Specify the destination.
To register the fax destination
[Name]
Enter the name of the destination.
[Fax Number]
Enter the fax number of the destination.
[ECM TX]
Select the check bo
x to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is
checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.
[Speed]
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the
transmission start speed downward.
[Long Distance]
Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering
overseas fax numbers.
Y
ou can also specify [ECM TX] and [Speed] from <Fax Settings> (
<Send>(P. 537) ) on the oper
ation panel.
However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations
registered in the Address Book.
Managing the Machine
428
To register the e-mail or I-Fax destination
[Name]
Enter the name of the destination.
[E-Mail Addr
ess]/[I-Fax Address]
Enter the e-mail address of the destination.
To register the shared folder or FTP server destination
[Name]
Enter the name for the destination.
[Pr
otocol]
Select the protocol for the destination.
[Windows (SMB)] Select this when registering a shared folder as a destination.
[FTP] Select this when registering an FTP server as a destination.
[Host Name]
For a shar
ed folder
Enter the computer name or IP address. You can include a path to the shared folder with the computer
name or IP address (e.g. "\\swan\share" or "\\192.168.2.100\share").
For an FTP server
Enter the IP address of the FTP server (e.g. "192.168.2.100").
Using a DNS server
Y
ou can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared
folder: "\\swan.organization.company.com\share").
Managing the Machine
429
[Folder Path]
Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent.
For a shar
ed folder
Use "\" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specied in [Host Name].
For an FTP server
Use "/" as a separator. The path is an absolute path when a "/" is placed at its top, otherwise a relative path
with respective to the current directory of the user who has logged in.
[User Name]
Enter the user name set for the shared folder or FTP server.
[Set Password]
To set a password for the shared folder or FTP server, select the check box and enter a [Password].
Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the
Remote UI.
[Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed corr
ectly or may not be referenceable.
7
Click [OK].
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Address Book List(P. 612)
Managing the Machine
430
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data
1W2X-085
Address Book and machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your
computer can also be r
egistered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book
to multiple machines.
*
To use these features, it is required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
*
If using the same model, you can import/export machine settings data.
Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Importing the Setting Data(P. 432)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete
It may tak
e a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the import or export process
Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.
For the settings that cannot be imported/e
xported, see
Setting Menu List(P. 439) .
Y
ou can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the
machine.
<Import/Export>(P. 573)
For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 424) .
Exporting the Setting Data
Y
ou can export Address Book and machine settings data, and save them on a computer. You can export Address Book
data as a device conguration information le (*.dcm) or Canon Address Book le (*.abk). Select the device
conguration information le type to save the data as a backup copy or copy the Address Book data to the same
machine model. Select the Canon Address Book le type to copy the Address Book data to the fax driver or a different
machine model. It is recommended that you regularly back up important settings.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Data Management] [Export].
4
Select the settings to export, and specify the encryption password.
Managing the Machine
431
[Address Book (ABK)]
Select the check bo
x to export the Address Book data as a Canon Address Book le (*.abk).
If
the [Address Book (ABK)] check box is selected, you cannot export the settings of the machine at the
same time with the Address Book data.
[Address Book]
Select the check box to export Address Book data as a device conguration information le (*.dcm).
[Address Book PIN]
If the Address Book is code-protected, enter the code for the Address Book.
Restricting Use of the
Addr
ess Book(P. 402)
[Settings/Registration]
Select the check box to export machine settings data.
[Encryption Password]
Enter a password to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in
[Conrm]. If the [Address Book] or [Settings/Registration] check box is selected, the data cannot be exported
without an encryption password set.
The passwor
d is required when exported data is imported.
Importing the Setting Data(P. 432)
5
Click [Start Exporting].
6
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported
data.
The setting data will be saved.
Importing the Setting Data
Load (import) data that was e
xported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another
machine to your machine if the models are the same. Furthermore, when applying the security policy to the machine,
follow the procedure described below to specify the security policy le.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 416)
Managing the Machine
432
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 417)
3
Select [Data Management] [Import].
4
Specify the le, enter the passwor
d, and select the settings to import.
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the le. You can only import a device conguration information le (*.dcm) and a
Canon Address Book le (*.abk). If you select the Canon Address Book le type, you do not need to set any
other items.
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
[Address Book]
Select the check box to import Address Book data.
Importing Addr
ess Book data will overwrite the Address Book entries currently registered on the machine.
[Address Book PIN]
If the Address Book is code protected, enter the code for the Address Book.
Restricting Use of the
Addr
ess Book(P. 402)
[Settings/Registration]
Select the check box to import machine settings data.
5
Click [Start Importing].
6
Click [OK].
The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
7
Click [OK].
If the [Settings/Registr
ation] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.
Managing the Machine
433
Updating the Firmware
1W2X-086
For the rmwar
e, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two
methods of update: the one is to access the latest rmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the
update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest rmware
version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed
in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a
wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.
Installation Condition of the Machine How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 434)
Wired LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 434)
Updating from a Computer(P. 435)
USB connection Updating from a Computer(P. 435)
If you ar
e in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform rmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,
and perform the update from the computer.
Checking the rmwar
e version
You can check the rmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the
rmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly.
Checking the Firmware
V
ersion(P. 435)
Updating via the Internet
Y
ou can access the Canon server from the machine to update the rmware to the latest version.
1
Select <Update Firmware> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
A check for e
xistence of the latest rmware is performed.
If
the <This is the latest rmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the
rmware.
2
When a license screen appears, select <Accept>.
3
Select <OK>.
When the rmwar
e update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
Managing the Machine
434
Do not turn OFF the machine while the r
estart is in progress.
Updating from a Computer
When you have do
wnloaded the latest rmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility
software to update the rmware from a computer. For how to perform rmware update from a computer, see the
"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.
To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>
<Update Firmware> <Via PC> <Yes>
Checking the Firmware Version
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Management Settings>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
3
Select <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
<Update
Firmwar
e>.
4
Select <Version Information>.
The curr
ent rmware version is displayed.
Managing the Machine
435
Initializing Settings
1W2X-087
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Menu(P. 436)
Initializing Key and Certicate(P
. 436)
Initializing Address Book(P. 437)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 437)
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 439) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to r
estart the machine after initialization.
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Menu> Select the item
you want to initialize <Yes> Restart the machine if necessary
Y
ou can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.
<Menu>
<Preferences> <Network> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine
Initializing Key and Certicate
Y
ou can restore the settings of the key and certicate and the CA certicate. Note that all the keys and certicates and
CA certicates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certicates) will be deleted after
initializing.
After initializing, functions that r
equire a key and certicate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE
of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key and
certicate and activate the functions again.
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Key and
Certicate> <Yes>
Managing the Machine
436
Initializing Address Book
You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be
deleted after initializing.
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Address
Book> <Yes>
Initializing All Data/Settings
This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents
sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process nishes,
the machine automatically restarts.
Befor
e initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.
These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.
To use the machine after initializing it, you need to congure all settings from the beginning.
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes> <Yes>
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 377)
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Managing the Machine
437
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ...........................................................................................................................................
439
<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 440
<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 441
<English Keyboard Layout> .......................................................................................................................... 445
<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 446
<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 451
<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 465
<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 466
<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 467
<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 468
<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 482
<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 484
<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 485
<Copy> ......................................................................................................................................................... 490
<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 492
<Send> ......................................................................................................................................................... 537
<Receive/Forward> ....................................................................................................................................... 548
<Store/Access Files> ..................................................................................................................................... 555
<Secure Print> .............................................................................................................................................. 563
<Set Destination> .............................................................................................................................................. 564
<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 565
<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 566
<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 567
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> ........................................................................... 571
<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 573
<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 575
Setting Menu List
438
Setting Menu List
1W2X-088
Y
ou can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this
chapter. To start conguration, select <Menu> on the Home screen (
Home Screen(P. 123) ). This section describes
what each item in the setting menu can congur
e.
<Preferences>(P. 440) This section describes the display and network settings.
<Adjustment/Maintenance>(P. 467) This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the
machine.
<Function Settings>(P. 484) This section describes the settings for the individual functions.
<Set Destination>(P. 564) This section describes the Address Book settings.
<Management Settings>(P. 565) This section describes the user and hardware information management, security
settings, etc.
Y
ou can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Printing Lists of
Settings(P
. 612)
Setting Menu List
439
<Preferences>
1W2X-089
Item Description
<Display Settings>(P. 441) This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 445) This section describes the USB keyboard settings.
<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 446) This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.
<Network>(P. 451) This section describes the network settings.
<External Interface>(P. 465) This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.
<Accessibility>(P. 466) This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen
colors and setting the message display time.
Setting Menu List
440
<Display Settings>
1W2X-08A
All the settings r
elated to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
(
).
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 441)
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>(P. 441)
<Language>(P. 442)
<Remote UI Language>(P. 442)
<Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area>(P. 443)
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>(P. 443)
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>(P. 444)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with "
*3
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>
By default, the Home scr
een is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function
is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function.
<Home>
<Copy>
<Fax>
*1
<Scan>
<Secur
e Print>
<Status Monitor>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen After Startup/
Restor
ation>
Select a function to display the desired screen
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>
*2
Congur
e the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen. You can select the settings that will be displayed
as shortcut buttons, rearrange the order in which the buttons appear, and insert or remove spaces.
Customizing
the Home Scr
een(P. 170)
<Select Button to Display>
<Favorite Cop
y Settings>
Setting Menu List
441
<Favorite Fax Settings>
*1
<Favorite Scan Settings>
<Set Display Order>
<Language>
*3
Select the display language used for the display
, reports, and lists.
<English>
<日本語>
<Fr
ançais>
<Español>
<Deutsch>
<Italiano>
<Nederlands>
<Suomi>
<Português>
<Norsk>
<Svenska>
<Dansk>
<Slovenščina>
<Čeština>
<Magyar>
<Русский>
<Türkçe>
<Ελληνικά>
<Eesti>
<Română>
<Slovenčina>
<Hrvatski>
<Български>
<Català>
<Polski>
<中文(简体)>
<中文(繁體)>
<한국어>
<Latviešu>
<Lietuvių>
<ةي
ب
رعلا>
<Euskara>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>
<Remote UI Language>
*3
Select the display language used for the Remote UI scr
eens.
<English>
Setting Menu List
442
<Japanese>
<Fr
ench>
<Spanish>
<German>
<Italian>
<Dutch>
<Finnish>
<Portuguese>
<Norwegian>
<Swedish>
<Danish>
<Czech>
<Hungarian>
<Russian>
<Turkish>
<Polish>
<Chinese (Simplied)>
<Chinese (Traditional)>
<Korean>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a
language
<Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area>
*1
Specify whether to display a message when stains ar
e detected in the document feed scanning area.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area> Select <Off>
or <On>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select the unit of measur
ement.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
Setting Menu List
443
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridges is low.
<Auto>
<Off>
<Custom>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.> Select <Off> in
<Auto> Enter toner level in <Custom> <Apply>
Setting Menu List
444
<English Keyboard Layout>
1W2X-08C
Specify the layout of an USB k
eyboard if connected to the machine. The default setting is marked with a dagger (
).
<USA Layout>
<UK Layout>
<Menu> <Preferences> <English Keyboard Layout> Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>
Setting Menu List
445
<Timer/Energy Settings>
1W2X-08E
All the settings r
elated to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
(
).
<Current Date/Time Settings>(P. 446)
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 446)
<Date Format>(P. 447)
<Time Format>(P. 447)
<Auto Reset Time>(P. 448)
<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 448)
<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 449)
<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 449)
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>(P. 450)
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>(P. 450)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with "
*2
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Current Date/Time Settings>
*1
Set the curr
ent date and time.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 12)
Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current
date and time are also changed accordingly.
The curr
ent date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time goes into effect.
<Date/Time Settings>
Specify the date and time standar
d of the region in which the machine is to be installed.
Setting Menu List
446
<Time Zone>
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accor
dingly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 12)
<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time> to <(UTC+14:00)
Kiritimati Island>
UTC
Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Daylight Saving Time Settings>
*2
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect.
<Off>
<On>
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, W
eek, Day
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving
Time Settings> Select <On>, and specify the dates <Apply>
<Date Format>
*2
Select the date format (or
der of year, month, and day).
<YYYY MM/DD>
<MM/DD/YYYY>
<DD/MM YYYY>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format
<Time Format>
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<12 Hour (AM/PM)>
Setting Menu List
447
<24 Hour>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Time Format> Select the display
setting
<Auto Reset Time>
If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the scr
een and the settings are initialized to display the
default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
The setting menu is displayed.
The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents or sending or receiving faxes.
An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the
error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Select <On> in <Set
This Function> Enter the time in <Set Time> <Apply>
The scr
een displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select whether to r
eturn the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is
selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed (
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 441) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display r
eturns to the
main screen of the function that was selected.
<Default Function>
<Selected Function>
Setting Menu List
448
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select
<Default Function> or <Selected Function>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Set a timer to automatically shut do
wn the machine after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the machine
entered the sleep mode.
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Select <On>, and
set the Auto Shutdo
wn time
<Apply>
Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>
When the <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you
are operating the machine from the Remote UI or from the Send Function Setting Tool. A malfunction may
occur, particularly if the machine shuts down while data is being imported. When you import data using the
Remote UI or use the Send Function Setting Tool, set <Auto Shutdown Time> to <Off> in advance.
If any settings of the [Timer Settings] ar
e changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically
shuts down after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
<Auto Sleep Time>
If the machine has not been oper
ated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
5 to 60 (min.)
Setting Menu List
449
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>
You can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>
Specify the time when the machine is r
ecovered from the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Setting Menu List
450
<Network>
1W2X-08F
All the settings r
elated to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 451)
<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 451)
<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 453)
<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 454)
<SNMP Settings>(P. 459)
<Use Dedicated Port>(P. 460)
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>(P. 461)
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>(P. 461)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 461)
<Use IEEE 802.1X>(P. 462)
<Firewall Settings>(P. 462)
<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 463)
<Device Settings Management>(P. 464)
<Monitoring Service>(P. 464)
<RMT-SW>(P. 464)
<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 464)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" cannot be imported or exported.
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
*1
When switching the machine fr
om Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>).
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)
<Wired LAN>
<Wireless LAN>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
*1
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wir
eless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
<SSID Settings>
Select to congur
e a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
Setting Menu List
451
<Select Access Point>
Wir
eless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wir
eless Router(P. 24)
<Enter Manually>
Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings
(P. 27)
<Security Settings>
<None>
<WEP>
<Open System>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<Shar
ed Key>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<WPA/WPA2-PSK>
<Auto>
<AES-CCMP>
<WPS Push Button Mode>
Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)
<WPS PIN Code Mode>
Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)
<Power Save Mode>
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed
message
<OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
<Connection Information>
*2
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
<MAC Address>
<Wir
eless LAN Status>
<Latest Error Information>
<Channel>
<SSID Settings>
<Security Settings>
<Power Save Mode>
Setting Menu List
452
<Direct Connection Settings>
*1
Set whether to connect dir
ectly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
<Use Direct Connection>
<Off>
<On>
<Direct Connection Termination>
Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.
<Automatically Terminate Session>
<Off>
<On>
<Time Until Session T
erminates>
1
to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Direct Connection
Termination> Select <On> in <Automatically Terminate Session> and enter the time <Apply>
<Apply>
<Access Point Mode Settings>
Congure the SSID/network k
ey arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the
same time, you need to congure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Use Custom SSID>
<Off>
<On>
<SSID>
<Use Custom Network Ke
y>
<Off>
<On>
<Network Ke
y>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode
Settings> Select <On> for each item and select <SSID>/<Network Key> Enter the SSID/network
k
ey
<Apply> <Apply> <Apply>
Setting Menu List
453
<TCP/IP Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Addr
ess Settings>
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)
<Auto Acquire>
<Auto Acquir
e>
<Off>
<On>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquir
e>
*1
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquir
e the
DNS server address or the domain name.
Conguring DNS
(P. 56)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquir
e DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquir
e WINS Server Address>
<Off>
Setting Menu List
454
<On>
<Acquir
e SMTP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire POP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer o
ver a network.
Testing the Network
Connection
(P. 33)
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)
<Use IPv6>
<Off>
<On>
<Check IPv6 Settings>
You can check the link-local address that is automatically acquired.
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
<Stateless Address Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Addr
ess>
<Prex Length>
<DHCPv6 Settings>
Enable or disable the stateful addr
ess that is acquired via DHCPv6.
<Use DHCPv6>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Addr
ess>
<Prex Length>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquir
e the
DNS server address or the domain name.
Conguring DNS
(P. 56)
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
455
<Acquir
e Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P
. 56)
<IPv4 DNS Server Address Settings>
Specify the IP address of the DNS server in the IPv4 environment.
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
Specify the host name of the machine to be r
egistered in the DNS server as well as the name of the domain
to which the machine belongs.
<IPv4>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<IPv6>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
Select whether to dynamically update the DNS r
ecords whenever the machine's IP address is changed.
<IPv4>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
<IPv6>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Manual Addr
ess>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateful Addr
ess>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateless Addr
ess>
<Off>
Setting Menu List
456
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
<IPv4>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<mDNS Name>
<IPv6>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4>
<Off>
<mDNS Name>
<On>
<WINS Settings>
Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
r
esolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP.
Conguring WINS(P
. 62)
<WINS Resolution>
<Off>
<On>
<WINS Server Addr
ess>: 0.0.0.0
<LPD Settings>
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You
can also set the r
eception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41)
<Use LPD Printing>
<Off>
<On>
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<RAW Settings>
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing pr
otocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after
which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD
Functions(P. 41)
<Use RAW Printing>
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
457
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<WSD Settings>
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD
pr
otocol.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 41)
<Use WSD Printing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Scanning>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Computer Scanning>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Disco
very>
<Off>
<On>
<Use FTP PASV Mode>
Specify whether to use PASV mode for FTP. If you are connecting to an FTP server through a r
ewall, you must
select PASV mode.
Conguring FTP P
ASV Mode(P. 73)
<Off>
<On>
<Use HTTP>
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
<Off>
<On>
<Use IPSec>
*2
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Conguring IPSec Settings(P
. 388)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use IPSec> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
458
<Port Number Settings>
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 374)
<LPD>
1 to 515 to 65535
<RA
W>
1 to 9100
to 65535
<WSD Multicast Disco
very>
1 to 3702
to 65535
<HTTP>
1 to 80 to 65535
<Multicast Disco
very>
1 to 427
to 65535
<POP3>
1 to 110 to 65535
<SMTP>
1 to 25
to 65535
<FTP>
1 to 21 to 65535
<SNMP>
1 to 161 to 65535
<MTU Size>
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission
Unit(P. 54)
<1300>
<1400>
<1500>
<SNMP Settings>
Specify the settings for monitoring and contr
olling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 69)
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
459
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv1
Settings> <Apply> Restart the machine
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv3
Settings> <Apply> Restart the machine
<Acquir
e Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible softwar
e.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Acquire
Printer Mngt. Info. fr
om Host>
<Apply> Restart the machine
<Format Host Rsr
cs. MIB to RFC2790>
Specify whether to conform to the advanced specications (RFC2790) of the pr
otocol when monitoring the
machine status from the SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Format
Host Rsr
cs. MIB to RFC2790>
<Apply> Restart the machine
<Use Dedicated Port>
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing, faxing, or scanning uses MF Scan
Utility and when br
owsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.
Setting Menu List
460
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Use Dedicated Port> Select <Off> or <On> Restart
the machine
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>
Specify whether to limit the authentication method specically to the secure one when using the dedicated port. If
<Mode 2> is selected, the authentication method is limited specically to the secure one.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Dedicated Port Auth. Method> Select <Mode 1> or
<Mode 2> Restart the machine
If <Mode 2> is selected, you cannot establish a connection fr
om the device management software or driver
in some cases.
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network envir
onment.
Setting a
W
ait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
0
to 300 (sec.)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>
Select the Ethernet type (10B
ASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/
full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.
<Auto Detect>
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 52)
<Off>
<Communication Mode>
<Half Duple
x>
<Full Duplex>
<Ethernet T
ype>
Setting Menu List
461
<10BASE-T>
<100BASE-TX>
<1000B
ASE-T>
<On>
When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duple
x>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.
<MAC Address>
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing
the MA
C Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)
<Use IEEE 802.1X>
*1*2
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
(P. 395)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Use IEEE 802.1X> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the
machine
<Firewall Settings>
Without pr
oper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 368)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
462
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 368)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> Restart the machine
<MA
C Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets sent to or received from devices with specied MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 371)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> Restart the machine
<Google Cloud Print Settings>
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
<Use Google Cloud Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Google Cloud Print Regist. Status>
*2
Setting Menu List
463
<Device Settings Management>
Specify whether to use iW Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as settings and Address Book
destinations. For detailed information on iW Management Console, contact your nearest Canon dealer. Conguring
Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins
(P. 76)
<Off>
<On>
<Monitoring Service>
*1*2
Enable communication with a r
emote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the
machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Monitoring Service> <Yes>
<RMT-SW>
Leave this switch set to <Off>. When the service r
epresentative remotely performs device maintenance, you may be
asked to set the switch to <On>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <RMT-SW> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the
machine
<Initialize Network Settings>
Select to r
eturn the Network Settings to the factory defaults.
<Initialize Menu>(P. 574)
Setting Menu List
464
<External Interface>
1W2X-08H
All the settings r
elated to the USB are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<USB Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable use of the USB port or a USB memory de
vice.
<Use as USB Device>
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB
Connection with a Computer
(P. 409)
<Off>
<On>
<Use USB Storage Device>
Specify whether to use a USB memory device.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use
USB Stor
age Device>
<Apply> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
465
<Accessibility>
1W2X-08J
All the settings r
elated to accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and message display time, are listed with
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 466)
<Brightness>(P. 466)
<Message Display Time>(P. 466)
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is har
d to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Brightness>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or <On>
<Brightness>
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Brightness> Adjust the brightness <Apply>
<Message Display Time>
Specify the interval in seconds at which two differ
ent messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2
to 5 (sec.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for the
interval <Apply>
Setting Menu List
466
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
1W2X-08K
Item Description
<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 468) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.
<Maintenance>(P. 482) This section describes how to use the cleaning functions.
Setting Menu List
467
<Adjust Image Quality>
1W2X-08L
All the settings r
elated to image quality adjustment are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger (
).
<Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 468)
<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 468)
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>(P. 469)
<Black Text Processing for Color>(P. 469)
<Adjust Print Position>(P. 469)
<Special Processing>(P. 470)
<Remove Streaks from Scan Area>(P. 481)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Auto Adjust Gradation>
Adjust the gr
adation, density, and color in copies or printouts.
Adjusting Gradation(P. 598)
<Full Adjust>
<Quick Adjust>
<Adjust Cop
y Image>
<Auto Correction Settings>
Select whether to automatically perform a quick gr
adation adjustment or color shift correction after the machine is
turned ON.
<Auto Adjust Image Regularly>
Select when to make an automatic quick gradation adjustment. If <When Turning Main Power ON> is selected,
quick adjustment is automatically made after the machine is turned ON. Y
ou can also perform this adjustment
manually (
Quick Adjust(P. 600) ).
<Off>
<When Turning Main Power ON>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction
Settings> <Auto Adjust Image Regularly> Select <Off> or <When Turning Main Power
ON>
Setting Menu List
468
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>
Select the timing at which the Correct Print Color Mismatch function is to be performed automatically after the
machine is turned ON. Y
ou can also perform this adjustment manually (
Correcting "Print Color
Mismatch
"(P. 603) ).
<After Printing First Job>
<When Turning Main Power ON>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction
Settings> <Correct Print Color Mismatch> Select <After Printing First Job> or <When Turning
Main Po
wer ON>
<Correct Print Color Mismatch>
Use this function if color shift has blurred the image. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 603)
<Black Text Processing for Color>
Select whether the color of black or blackish text in color documents should be reproduced as true black or as a color
more or less close to that of the original. For each option, you can adjust the degree of effect. You can set values for
the feeder and the platen glass separately. Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility(P. 604)
<Feeder>
*
Seven Levels
<Platen Glass>
Seven Levels
<Adjust Print Position>
Adjust the print position for each paper sour
ce. The print position can be adjusted in the range from -5.0 to +5.0 mm in
increments of 0.1 mm.
Adjusting Print Position(P. 606)
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Adjust V
ertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Fr
ont Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust V
ertically (Back Side)>
*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Dr
awer 1>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
Setting Menu List
469
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust V
ertically (Back Side)>
*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
*
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Dr
awer 2>
*
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust V
ertically (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)
<Special Processing>
If the print r
esults on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
<Special Paper Processing>
When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved
b
y adjusting the following settings.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting
separately for each paper source.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Dr
awer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)> Select
<On> in the paper sour
ce to be set
<Apply> <Yes>
Setting Menu List
470
If
you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time
elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
<Rough Surface Paper Mode>
When printing on rough paper, especially when color images are printed too light, select <On>. You can
specify the settings separately for each paper source.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Dr
awer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Paper Mode> Select <On> in the
paper sour
ce to be set
<Apply> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer or image quality may be affected.
<Env. Flap Closing Prevention>
If envelope aps cling to the envelope bodies when printing, select <On>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Special Paper Processing> <Env. Flap Closing Prevention> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, toner may not be x
ed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>
Printouts may wrinkle depending on the paper to use. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
Setting Menu List
471
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Special Paper Processing> <Paper Wrinkle Correction> Select the
mode <Yes>
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
This setting is effective for plain paper and thin paper.
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
<Mode 1> is effective for envelopes, and <Mode 2>, for envelopes and thin paper.
When <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> is specied, printed images may be blurry.
<Paper Curl Correction>
If the printed paper curls, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode
1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Special Paper Processing> <Paper Curl Correction> Select the
mode <Yes>
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output>
*
When performing 2-sided printing in color, paper may stick together at the output. Setting to <On> will slow
do
wn the printing speed of prints that may easily stick together, to reduce sticking.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
<Off>
<On>
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
472
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output> <On> <Yes>
<High Humidity Mode>
Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <High
Humidity Mode> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On> and use the machine in an envir
onment with low humidity, printed images and text
may be blurry.
<Low Humidity Mode>
When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this
case, setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Low
Humidity Mode> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, print density may be lo
wer or uneven when the machine is used in an environment
with high humidity.
<Reduce Ghosting 1>
*
If the printout reveals a ghost of an image in the same page, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
473
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Ghosting 1> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, toner may not be x
ed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Reduce Ghosting 2>
If continuous printing involves generation of ghost images, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Ghosting 2> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, print density may be une
ven.
<Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>
*
If the xing assembly is dirty
, edges of the paper may get smudged. In this case, changing the setting of this
item may solve the problem. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency of regular cleaning is
performed.
<Auto>
<Level 1>
<Le
vel 2>
<Level 3>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly> Select the level <Yes>
If a higher le
vel is specied, the printing speed will be slower.
Setting Menu List
474
<Rdc. Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)>
*
When performing 2-sided printing after 1-sided printing, the printed images may be faint due to moisture
condensation. In this case, setting to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc.
Condens. (1-Sd->2-Sd Prt)> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
<Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)>
*
If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other
than <Off> may solve the pr
oblem.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc
Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)> Select the item <Yes>
For MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
, the improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>.
If you set to other than <Off>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.
<Correct Uneven Gloss>
*
When gloss unevenness occurs in the leading edge of paper, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
475
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Correct Uneven Gloss> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, toner may not be x
ed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.
<Corr. Void on Paper Back Side>
*
When performing 2-sided printing on thin paper, void may occur on the back side of paper in the leading edge.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Corr.
V
oid on Paper Back Side>
<On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
<Correct Void>
*
If printing on thin paper produces void in the leading edge of the paper, setting this item to <On> may solve the
pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing>
<Correct Void> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, printouts may be faded.
<Drop Pattern Reduction Mode>
If print density is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this item to <On> may
solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
Setting Menu List
476
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Drop
Pattern Reduction Mode> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
<Corr. Img. Corrup. by Ppr Dust>
*
Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. In this case, setting this item
to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Corr.
Img. Corrup. b
y Ppr Dust>
<On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
<Correct Blurry Image>
*
When performing 2-sided printing, the image may be blurry on the back side of paper in the trailing edge. In
this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Correct Blurry Image> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
<Prevent Fogging>
If white areas are lightly colored, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Setting Menu List
477
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Prevent Fogging> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.
<Correct Color Mismatch>
*
If color mismatch occurs, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Correct Color Mismatch> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
<Reduce Drum Streak>
If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Drum Streak> <On>
<Reduce Toner Flaking>
*
Toner may peel off the printed page depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,
setting this item may solve the pr
oblem. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than <Mode 1>.
First try with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
Setting Menu List
478
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Toner Flaking> Select the mode <Yes>
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1>
*
When toner stain (spotted stain) appears on the printed paper, the problem may not be solved even if you
cleaning the xing assembly
. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1> <On> <Yes>
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2>
*
When the machine is used in an environment with high humidity, faded or curled printouts may be output. In
this case, changing the setting of this item may solve the pr
oblem.
<Auto>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Pr
ocessing>
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2> Select the item <Yes>
<Auto>
Automatically adjusts toner xing.
Setting Menu List
479
<Mode 1>
If printouts ar
e curled, set to this option.
<Mode 2>
If printouts are faded, set to this option.
If you set to <Mode 1>, printouts may be faded.
If you set to <Mode 2>, printouts may be curled.
<Auto Detect B&W/Color Original>
When black and white print data is mixed with color data, specify whether to prioritize the print speed or to
r
educe the toner usage of the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges when printing data.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Auto
Detect B&W/Color Orig.> Select the mode <Yes>
<Mode 1>
Prioritizes the print speed when printing.
<Mode 2>
Reduces the toner usage of toner cartridges when printing.
<Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.>
Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case, setting
this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Rdc.
Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.> <On> <Yes>
Setting Menu List
480
If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with ne
xt replacement of toner cartridges.
Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly
distributed inside the cartridge.
<Remove Streaks from Scan Area>
*
Y
ou can congure a setting to prevent stains from being scanned when they are detected in the document feed
scanning area. Selecting <On> removes streaks generated by the edge of the original.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Remove Streaks from Scan
Ar
ea>
Select <Off> or <On>
When str
eaks are removed, areas with stains are not scanned. Clean the original scanning area so that the
original is scanned satisfactorily.
Setting Menu List
481
<Maintenance>
1W2X-08R
The cleaning functions ar
e listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>(P. 482)
<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 482)
<Clean ITB>(P. 482)
<Clean Feeder>(P. 482)
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>
*
Clean the xing assembly when the edge or back side of the printout is smudged.
Cleaning the Fixing
Assembly(P. 586)
<Clean Fixing Assembly>
Clean the xing assembly after a toner cartridge is r
eplaced or if black streaks appear on printouts.
Cleaning the
Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
<Clean ITB>
Clean the tr
ansfer belt inside the machine to prevent the print quality from deteriorating.
Cleaning the Transfer
Belt (ITB)(P. 588)
<Clean Feeder>
*
Clean the feeder r
ollers if originals become dirty after being fed through the feeder.
Cleaning the Feeder(P. 583)
<Control Condensation>
When the temper
ature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which
may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When
selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs.
<Off>
<On>
<Use Fax Memory Lock> /<Allow Job Printing During Process>
<Use Fax Memory Lock + Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process>/<Do Not Allow Job Printing During
Pr
ocess>
Setting Menu List
482
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance> <Control Condensation> <On>
Check the message <OK> Select the item <Yes>
While condensation r
emoval is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Setting Menu List
483
<Function Settings>
1W2X-08S
Item Description
<Common>(P. 485) This section describes settings common to each function.
<Copy>(P. 490) This section describes how to specify the copy settings.
<Printer>(P. 492) This section describes how to specify printer settings.
<Send>(P. 537) This section describes how to specify settings for sending faxes and scanned originals.
<Receive/Forward>(P. 548) This section describes how to specify settings for receiving faxes and e-mails.
<Store/Access Files>(P. 555) This section describes the settings for scanning originals and printing stored les.
<Secure Print>(P. 563) This section describes the settings for the Secure Print.
Setting Menu List
484
<Common>
1W2X-08U
All the items r
elated to settings common to each function are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with
a dagger (
).
<Paper Feed Settings>(P. 485)
<Scan Settings>(P. 487)
<Generate File>(P. 488)
<Fax Setup Guide>(P. 489)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" cannot be imported or exported.
<Paper Feed Settings>
Congur
e paper feed settings.
<Paper Source Auto Selection>
Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is
set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper sour
ce that is loaded with the
appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching
from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
Automatically Selecting an
Appr
opriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 168)
<Copy>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*1
<Off>
<On>
<Printer>
<Multi-Purpose T
ray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*1
<Off>
Setting Menu List
485
<On>
<Receive/Fax >/<Receive>
<Multi-Purpose T
ray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*1
<Off>
<On>
<Other>
<Multi-Purpose T
ray>
<Off>
<On>
<Dr
awer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>
*1
<Off>
<On>
<Switch Paper Feed Method>
*1
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with
logos, you need to change ho
w the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are
performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load
the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. For more
information, see
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 157) .
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Dr
awer 1>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Dr
awer 2>
*1
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings> <Switch Paper Feed
Method>
Select the paper source Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Setting Menu List
486
Paper Sources
Select the paper sour
ce that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been pr
eprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
W
e recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-
sided printing is selected.
If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper sour
ce that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing
(
Available Paper(P. 705) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper sour
ce instead. In this case, you need
to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected (
Loading Preprinted
Paper(P
. 157) ).
1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
<Scan Settings>
Congur
e scan settings.
<Auto Online>
When scanning from the computer, use this to specify whether to automatically go online for remote scanning
(scan standb
y mode) without using the operation panel.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Scan Settings> <Auto Online> Select <Off> or
<On>
Setting Menu List
487
<Auto Oine>
If scan is not performed within a specied period of time after the scr
een below is displayed (the machine is
set online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the
machine becomes oine.
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Scan Settings> <Auto Oine> Select <On> in
<Set This Function> Enter the time in <Set Time> <Apply>
<Generate File>
Congur
e le generation settings.
<Output File Image Settings>
Specify settings for the gamma value for converting scanned originals into les.
<Y
CbCr TX Gamma Value>
Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color originals into the specied le format. You can
specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted les. The
les are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents.
<Gamma 1.0>
<Gamma 1.4>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.2>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Generate File> <Output File Image Settings>
<YCbCr TX Gamma Value> Select the gamma value
For the gamma value of a monitor display
, see the instruction manual included with the display.
Setting Menu List
488
<OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>
To run OCR (Optical Character Recognition) on a text original to create a "searchable PDF," specify whether the
machine determines the original'
s text direction and detects the original direction.
<Smart Scan>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Generate File> <OCR (Text Searchable)
Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Smart Scan> <Apply>
<256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt. PDF)>
*1
When generating an encrypted PDF, the PDF encryption level can be set to "128-bit" or "256-bit." If "256-bit" is
selected, the version compatible with Acr
obat can be changed.
<Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent>
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Generate File> <256-bit AES Set. (Encrypt.
PDF)> Select <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent> or <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent>
<Fax Setup Guide>
*1*2
Select to display on-scr
een instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the RX mode.
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 79)
Setting Menu List
489
<Copy>
1W2X-08W
All the settings r
elated to the copy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Change Default Settings (Copy)>
Y
ou can change the default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy
function.
Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<Paper Sour
ce>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Drawer 1>
<Drawer 2>
*
<Density>
Nine Le
vels
<Adjust Background Density>
<Auto>
<Adjust (Manual)>
Nine Levels
<Density b
y Color>
<Red>: Nine Levels
<Green>: Nine Levels
<Blue>: Nine Levels
<Copy Ratio>
Custom Ratio
<100% 1:01>
<400% Max>
<200%>
<141% A5->A4>
<70% A4->A5>
<50%>
<25% Min>
<2-Sided Printing>
*
<Off>
Setting Menu List
490
<1-Sided->2-Sided>
<2-Sided->2-Sided>
*
<2-Sided->1-Sided>
*
<Orig./Fin. T
ype>
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<Layout>
<Original T
ype>
<Text/Photo/Map (Speed)>
<Text/Photo/Map>
<Text/Photo/Map (Quality)>
<Printed Image>
<T
ext>
<Collate>
<Off>
<On>
<Er
ase Frame>
<Off>
<On>
<Sharpness>
Se
ven Levels
<Color Balance>
Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
17 Levels
<Fine Adjust>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>: 17 Levels
<Medium>: 17 Levels
<Low>: 17 Levels
Setting Menu List
491
<Printer>
1W2X-08X
All the settings r
elated to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Printer Settings>(P. 492)
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 535)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" cannot be imported or exported.
Priority of settings
If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and
printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.
<Printer Settings>
Congur
e settings about printing and printer operations.
<Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing>
Select whether printing is performed in accordance with the printer driver's settings for paper size and type
taking priority o
ver the settings made for each paper source under <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. By
selecting <On>, you can print from the paper source specied in the printer driver, regardless of the paper
settings on the machine. An error message can be set to display if the loaded paper size is largely different from
that set in the printer driver.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Prioritize Driver Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Action When Size Mismatch>
<For
ce Output>
<Display Error>
<Drawer 1>
<Prioritize Driver Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Action When Size Mismatch>
Setting Menu List
492
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Dr
awer 2>
*1
<Prioritize Driver Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Action When Size Mismatch>
<For
ce Output>
<Display Error>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize Driver Settings When
Printing> Select the paper source Select <On> in <Prioritize Driver Settings> <Action When
Size Mismatch> Select <Force Output> or <Display Error> <Apply>
<Force Output>
Continue printing e
ven when the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely
different.
<Display Error>
When the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely different, an error message is
displayed and printing is stopped.
If the printer driver
's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected, a
paper jam or printing error may occur.
<Copies>
Set the number of copies to print.
1 to 999
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of
copies to print <Apply>
<2-Sided Printing>
*1
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
Setting Menu List
493
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select
<Off> or <On>
<Default Paper>
Set the default paper size and type. Printing will be performed with paper of the size and type set here when
you want to print fr
om an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not
supporting paper size and type settings.
Available Paper(P. 705)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the
paper size Select the paper type
<Paper Size Override>
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but
the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print fr
om the computer but A4 size
paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Paper Size Override> Select
<Off> or <On>
Y
ou can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an
application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specied on
the machine.
<Print Quality>
You can change settings related to print quality.
<Density>
*1
Adjust the toner density
.
Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
17 Le
vels
<Fine Adjust>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
Setting Menu List
494
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Le
vels
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print
Quality> <Density> Adjust the density of each color <Apply>
Y
ou can use <Fine Adjust> to adjust the toner density of each color to three density levels: high
density, medium density, and low density.
When <T
oner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.
<Toner Save>
You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance
characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner
Save> Select <Off> or <On>
<Gradation>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High 1>.
<High 1>
<High 2>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print
Quality> <Gradation> Select <High 1> or <High 2>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Density Fine Adjustment>
When ne lines or small te
xt are faded, increase the density to give less faded print.
Five Levels
Setting Menu List
495
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine
Adjustment> Adjust the adjustment value <Apply>
A change in the density affects objects other than te
xt or lines and the color balance.
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print
Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode
1> (default), try another mode.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Mode 5>
<Mode 6>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special
Smoothing Mode> Select the mode
<Mode 1>
Prints an outline of dark te
xt or a gure with a smooth nish. This is the optimal mode for various types of
printing.
<Mode 2>
Prints gure outline and internal halftones with a smooth nish.
<Mode 3>
Setting Menu List
496
Prints dark text or lines on an area with a colored background with a smooth nish.
<Mode 4>
Prints an image such as a photo or an outline of a gur
e or text with a smooth nish.
<Mode 5>
Prints an image and halftones with an even balance.
<Mode 6>
Prints the entire image with a smooth nish.
When <Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>, printing in modes other than <Mode 5> all produces
the same results.
When <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>, all settings other than <Mode 6> produce the same result.
<Toner Volume Correction>
When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the
toner volume does not exceed the limit value.
<Standard>
<Gradation Priority>
<T
ext Priority>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner
V
olume Correction>
Select the item
<Standard>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that pr
oper resolution is ensured for text and lines, and that proper color
tone is ensured for other types of print data.
<Gradation Priority>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper color tone is ensured for all types of print data.
<Text Priority>
Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for all types of print data.
<Line Control>
Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines.
<Resolution Priority>
<Gradation Priority>
Setting Menu List
497
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Line
Contr
ol>
Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation Priority>
<Resolution Priority>
Dr
aws lines with the same resolution as for text.
<Gradation Priority>
Draws lines while maintaining color and gradation.
<Width Adjustment>
Congure a setting to print text or ne lines in bold.
<Off>
<On>
<T
ext>
<Line>
<Text and Line>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Width
Adjustment> <On> Select the target
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer or image quality may be affected.
Even if you set to <On>, bold printing may not be possible depending on the printing application.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Congure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications)
or text with a smooth nish.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than
<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.
<Off>
<Le
vel 1>
<Level 2>
Setting Menu List
498
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced
Smoothing> <Advanced Smoothing> Select the item
<Apply to Graphics> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing pr
ocessing to graphics when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced
Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>
<Apply to Text> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing pr
ocessing to the text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced
Smoothing> <Apply to Text> Select <Off> or <On>
The
settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> are only effective when [Advanced Smoothing] is
set to [Printer Default] in the printer driver.
<Gradation Smoothing>
Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created
using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish.
<Gradation Smoothing>
Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than
<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Le
vel 2>
Setting Menu List
499
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation
Smoothing> <Gradation Smoothing> Select the item
<Apply to Graphics> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing pr
ocessing to graphics when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation
Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>
<Apply to Images> *1
Specify whether to apply smoothing pr
ocessing to images when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level
1> or <Level 2>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation
Smoothing> <Apply to Images> Select <Off> or <On>
[Gr
adation Smoothing] in the printer driver applies only to graphics data. The setting congured here
applies to smoothing processing for image data.
<Enhance Text for B&W Printing>
When printing a color document in black and white, using this item adjusts the density of text to make it
more legible. This is useful and effective for printing in black and white a color document containing light-
colored text.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Enhance
T
ext for B&W Printing>
Select <Off> or <On>
This item does not apply to te
xt drawn as graphics or images.
Setting Menu List
500
This item has no effect on PDF or PS print data.
If
you set this item to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text, the text is printed
thinner than when <On> is selected, so it may be more or less illegible.
Even when this item is set to <Off>, the print result may be such that text looks emphasized. If so, also set
<Advanced Smoothing> to <Off>.
<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 498)
<Layout>
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.
<Binding Location>
If you ar
e binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind
on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which species the
binding margin to apply to the binding position.
<Long Edge>
<Short Edge>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding
Location> Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
<Gutter>
Shift the print position to adjust the binding mar
gin to apply to the binding edge specied by <Binding
Location>. The value "00.0" exerts no effect on the binding margin.
-50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Gutter> Specify
the binding mar
gin
<Apply>
Setting Menu List
501
Entering the setting value
Specify the print position shift dir
ection and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value
determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in
0.5 mm increments.
Basic Operation(P. 129)
Setting Value Long Edge Short Edge
A value with a "+" sign Left edge of paper Top edge of paper
A value with a "-" sign Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper
<Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>
Irr
espective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of "0.5 mm" for all print jobs.
-50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the
combination of adjustment dir
ection and printing side
Specify the offset value <Apply>
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.
Setting Menu List
502
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing do
wn.
Entering the setting value
For <Offset Short Edge (Fr
ont)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a
value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,
specify a value with a "-" sign.
Basic Operation(P. 129)
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>
<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
<Auto Skip Error>
Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will
be skipped and printing can continue. Normally
, set this item to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Auto Skip Error> Select
<Off> or <On>
<Timeout>
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data
r
eception interruption.
5 to 15
to 300 (sec.)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time
period <Apply>
<Personality>
Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.
<Auto>
<PS>
*1
<PCL>
*1
<PDF>
Setting Menu List
503
<XPS>
<Imaging>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Personality> Select the
Personality mode
<Color Mode>
Select whether to print data in color or black and white.
<Auto (Color/B&W)>
<Black & White>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Color Mode> Select <Auto
(Color/B&W)> or <Black & White>
<Compressed Image Output>
Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insucient memory
during printing.
<Output>
<Display Error>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Compressed Image Output>
Select <Output> or <Display Error>
<Output>
Continues printing r
egardless of how much the image quality has degraded.
<Display Error>
If the image quality has degraded signicantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.
<Prioritize MP Tray>
Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is
selected, paper is fed fr
om the multi-purpose tray when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both
the multi-purpose tray and paper drawer.
<Off>
Setting Menu List
504
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize MP Tray> Select
<Off> or <On>
<UFR II>
You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.
<Halftones>
Y
ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
Produces ner printing results than using <Resolution/Gradation>. This option is suitable for printing
sharp outlines of the text or ne-line data.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Halftones>
<Error Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Resolution/Gr
adation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gr
adation>
Setting Menu List
505
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR
II> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or
<Gr
adation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Pr
oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Matching Method>
Specify the processing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Matching
Method> Select the item
<General>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
<Perceptual>
Setting Menu List
506
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Gray Compensation>
Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Gr
aphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Gray
Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Paper
Save> Select <Off> or <On>
<PCL>
*1
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Paper Save>
Select whether to save paper b
y not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine
will not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that
you have inserted in your document, select <Off>.
Setting Menu List
507
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select
<Off> or <On>
<Orientation>
Select <Portr
ait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select
<Portr
ait> or <Landscape>
<Font Number>
Specify the font to use b
y selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel.
PCL Font List(P. 613)
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
0 to 104
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw
0 to 54
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font
Number> Select the font number <Apply>
<Point Size>
*1
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 incr
ements. You can specify this setting only when a
proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00
to 999.75 (point)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify
the point size <Apply>
Setting Menu List
508
<Pitch>
*1
Set the font pitch, or cpi (char
acters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
0.44 to 10.00
to 99.99 (cpi)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the
pitch value <Apply>
<Form Lines>
Set the number of lines printed on one page fr
om 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according
to the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64
to 128 (lines)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form
Lines> Specify the number of lines <Apply>
<Character Code>
Select the char
acter code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting
is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
<ARABIC8>
<DESKT
OP>
<GREEK8>
<HEBREW7>
<HEBREW8>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOCYR>
<ISOGRK>
<ISOHEB>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC851>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC862>
<PC864>
<PC866>
<PC8DN>
<PC8GRK>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMA
TH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINARB>
<WINBALT>
Setting Menu List
509
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<WINCYR>
<WINGRK>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
<WINL5>
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw
<DESKTOP>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MA
TH8>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC8DN>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMA
TH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINBALT>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
<WINL5>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character
Code> Select the character code
<Custom Paper>
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension>
and <Y dimension>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom
Paper> Select <Off> or <On>
<Unit of Measure>
*1
Select the unit of measur
ement to use to set a custom paper size.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
Setting Menu List
510
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of
Measur
e>
Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>
<X dimension>
*1
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 215 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X
dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
<Y dimension>
*1
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 355 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y
dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
<Append CR to LF>
Select whether to append a carriage r
eturn (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
<Yes>
<No>
Setting Menu List
511
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to
LF> Select <Yes> or <No>
<Enlarge A4 Print Width>
Select whether to e
xpand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of
Letter size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print
Width> Select <Off> or <On>
<Halftones>
Y
ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
Produces ner printing results than using <Resolution/Gradation>. This option is suitable for printing
sharp outlines of the text or ne-line data.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> <Error
Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Resolution/Gr
adation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
Setting Menu List
512
<Gradation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones>
<Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Matching Method>
Specify the processing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Matching
Method> Select the item
<General>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
Setting Menu List
513
<Perceptual>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Gray Compensation>
Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Gr
aphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gray
Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>
<BarDIMM>
*1
This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit. If <Enable> is selected, the
machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable>
is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.
<Disable>
<Enable>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <BarDIMM> Select
<Disable> or <Enable>
T
o enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not
printing bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular
print jobs may be reduced.
Setting Menu List
514
The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Bar
code Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.
<FreeScape>
*1
Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does
not support the standard Escape Code.
<Off>
<~>
<">
<#>
<$>
</>
<\>
<?>
<{>
<}>
<|>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <FreeScape> Select
an escape code
This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.
<PS>
*1
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Job Timeout>
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time befor
e a job times out. If a job has not nished within
the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.
0
to 3600 (sec.)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Job Timeout>
Specify the seconds for job timeout <Apply>
<Print PS Errors>
This setting determines whether an err
or page is printed when an error is encountered.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
515
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Print PS Errors>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Pure Black Text>
Congur
es a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C
= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based
on the <Output Prole> setting.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Pure Black Text>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Black Overprint>
*1
Specify the printing method used when black te
xt overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not
displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Black Overprint>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Outlines black te
xt from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.
Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
<On>
Prints all the color
ed backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using
only the black (K) toner, then prints.
Setting Menu List
516
<RGB Source Pr
ole>
*2
Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <RGB Source Prole>
Select the pr
ole
<sRGB>
Sets the image quality to the industry standar
d for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor
supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
<Gamma 1.5> to <Gamma 2.4>
Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from
being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
<None>
Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.
<CMYK Simulation Prole>
*2
Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent
CMYK color model based on the simulation.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U
.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Simulation
Pr
ole>
Select the pr
ole
Setting Menu List
517
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Set a JapanColor pr
ole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing
standard.
<None>
Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.
When <None> is selected, the dark color gr
adation may become uneven depending on data.
<Use Grayscale Prole>
*2
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Use Grayscale Pr
ole>
Select <Off> or <On>
Even
if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output
Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.
<Output Prole>
*2
Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Gr
aphics>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
Setting Menu List
518
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Output Pr
ole>
Select the type of image Select the pr
ole
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
<TR Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K
(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
<TR Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and
gray elements.
The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.
<RGB Sour
ce Prole> is set to <None>
<CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>
<Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
Setting Menu List
519
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Matching Method>
Select the item
<Perceptual>
Pr
ovides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.
<Saturation>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation
materials.
<Colorimetric>
Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine
as accurately as possible.
The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Sour
ce Prole> is set to <None>.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
Produces ner printing results than using <Resolution/Gradation>. This option is suitable for printing
sharp outlines of the text or ne-line data.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Error
Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Resolution/Gr
adation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
Setting Menu List
520
<Resolution>
<Gr
adation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gr
adation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select
<Resolution> or <Gr
adation>
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Pr
oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Brightness>
*1
Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the
image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.
85 to 100
to 115 (%)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Brightness> Adjust
the brightness
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to o
verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.
<Off>
Setting Menu List
521
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Composite
Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>
Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.
<Gr
ayscale Conversion>
*1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Grayscale Conversion>
Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differ
ences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<Imaging Settings>
You can change the print settings that will apply when printing image les (
JPEG/TIFF).
<Halftones>
You can change the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the
lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
Setting Menu List
522
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Imaging
Settings> <Halftones> Select <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>
<Gradation>
Prints images with ne gr
adation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.
<Error Diffusion>
Prints images with small text or ne lines with a clear nish.
<PDF>
You can change settings for PDF les.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit
Paper Size>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to e
xtend the print range to the paper size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge Print Area>
Select <Off> or <On>
If
you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts
come out partially smudged depending on the original.
Setting Menu List
523
<N on 1>
Specify whether to shrink multiple pages and print them on one page in such arr
angement that the rst
page is positioned at top left. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <N on 1> Select the
number of pages to be combined
<Print Comments>
Specify whether to print comments. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF les will be printed.
<Off>
<Auto>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Print Comments>
Select <Off> or <Auto>
<Pure Black Text>
Congur
es a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C
= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based
on the <Output Prole> setting.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Pure Black Text>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Black Overprint>
*1
Specify the printing method used when black te
xt overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not
displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
524
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Black Overprint>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Outlines black te
xt from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.
Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
<On>
Prints all the color
ed backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using
only the black (K) toner, then prints.
<RGB Source Pr
ole>
*2
Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <RGB Source Pr
ole>
Select the pr
ole
<sRGB>
Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor
supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
Setting Menu List
525
<Gamma 1.5> to <Gamma 2.4>
Adjusts the brightness of the print r
esult to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from
being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
<None>
Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.
<CMYK Simulation Prole>
*2
Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent
CMYK color model based on the simulation.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U
.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <CMYK Simulation
Pr
ole>
Select the pr
ole
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Set a JapanColor pr
ole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing
standard.
<None>
Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.
When <None> is selected, the dark color gr
adation may become uneven depending on data.
<Use Grayscale Prole>
*2
Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
526
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Use Grayscale
Pr
ole>
Select <Off> or <On>
Even
if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output
Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.
<Output Prole>
*2
Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Gr
aphics>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Output Pr
ole>
Select the type of image Select the pr
ole
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting Menu List
527
Prole
<Normal>
Prints data b
y adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
<TR Normal>
Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K
(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
<TR Photo>
Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and
gray elements.
The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.
<RGB Sour
ce Prole> is set to <None>
<CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>
<Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>
<Matching Method>
Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Matching Method>
Select the item
<Perceptual>
Pr
ovides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.
<Saturation>
Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation
materials.
<Colorimetric>
Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine
as accurately as possible.
The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Sour
ce Prole> is set to <None>.
Setting Menu List
528
<Halftones>
Y
ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
Produces ner printing results than using <Resolution/Gradation>. This option is suitable for printing
sharp outlines of the text or ne-line data.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Error
Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Resolution/Gr
adation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select
<Resolution> or <Gr
adation>
Setting Menu List
529
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Pr
oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Brightness>
*1
Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the
image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.
85 to 100
to 115 (%)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Brightness> Adjust
the brightness
<Composite Overprint>
Specify whether to o
verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Composite
Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>
Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.
<Gr
ayscale Conversion>
*1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
Setting Menu List
530
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Grayscale
Conversion> Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differ
ences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<XPS>
You can change settings for XPS les.
<Matching Method>
Specify the pr
ocessing method used to correct the color.
<General>
<Perceptual>
<Colorimetric>
<Vivid Photo>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Matching Method>
Select the item
<General>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
<Perceptual>
Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an
image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
<Colorimetric>
Setting Menu List
531
Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
<Vivid Photo>
Performs pr
ocessing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Error Diffusion>
Produces ner printing results than using <Resolution/Gradation>. This option is suitable for printing
sharp outlines of the text or ne-line data.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Error
Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>
This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
<Resolution/Gr
adation> *1
Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be
specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gr
adation>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select
<Resolution> or <Gr
adation>
Setting Menu List
532
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Pr
oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Gray Compensation>
Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only
the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can
be specied for each image type in any one document.
<Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Graphics>
<Off>
<On>
<Image>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Gray
Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>
<Grayscale Conversion>
*1
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<Text>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
Setting Menu List
533
<Gr
aphics>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Image>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Grayscale
Conversion> Select the type of image Select the type of grayscale conversion
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <T
ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differ
ences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the
NTSC system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
534
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Paper Save> Select
<Off> or <On>
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer b
y using Plug and Play.
<Network>
*2
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected o
ver the network.
<FAX>
*1
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>
*1
<PS>
*1
<USB>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB
.
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>
*1
<PS>
*1
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
<FAX>
Detects and connects the machine as a fax de
vice.
<UFR II>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.
<UFR II (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).
<PCL6>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
Setting Menu List
535
<PS>
Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.
Setting Menu List
536
<Send>
1W2X-08Y
All the settings r
elated to sending faxes and scanned originals are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked
with a dagger (
).
<Common Settings>(P. 537)
<Scan and Send Settings>(P. 538)
<Fax Settings>(P. 542)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
Settings marked with "
*3
" cannot be imported or exported.
<Common Settings>
Congur
e the settings to restrict destinations at the time of sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes, and specify the
conrmation method to prevent transmission to wrong destinations.
<Restrict New Destinations>
Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail/I-Fax addresses that can be specied as destinations to
those alr
eady registered in the Address Book.
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P
. 404)
<Off>
<On>
<Restrict Resending from Log>
Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. Disabling Use of
Pr
eviously Used Destinations(P. 404)
<Off>
<On>
<Conrm When Coded Dial TX>
Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.
Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 404)
<Off>
<On>
<Conrm Dest. Befor
e Sending>
Specify whether to display the destination conrmation scr
een when sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes. If <Only
for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the conrmation screen is displayed only when multiple destinations are
specied.
Checking Destinations when Sending Data(P. 405)
<Off>
Setting Menu List
537
<On>
<Only for Sequential Br
oadcast>
<Scan and Send Settings>
You can change and register the settings for sending faxes or scanned documents.
<Register Unit Name>
Register the sender name for e-mails and I-Faxes. The registered name is displayed in e-mails, along with the e-
mail addr
ess. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <Register Unit
Name> Enter the sender name <Apply>
<E-Mail Settings>
Change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails.
<Change Default Settings (E-Mail)>
Y
ou can change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails. The selected settings are
used as the default settings when scanning originals.
Changing the Default Settings for
Functions
(P. 175)
<Scan Size>
<A4>
<A5R>
<B5>
<L
GL>
<LTR>
<STMT>
<EXEC>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>
<LEGAL (Government)>
<LEGAL (India)>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>
<File Format>
<PDF>
<PDF (Compact)>
<PDF (Compact/OCR)>
<PDF (OCR)>
<Set PDF Details>
<PDF>/<PDF (Compact)>/<PDF (Compact/OCR)>/<PDF (OCR)>
<Encryption>
<None>
Setting Menu List
538
<Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
<Acr
obat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*1
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*1
<Digital Signatures>
<None>
<Top Left>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<JPEG>
<TIFF>
<Set TIFF Details>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<Density>
Nine Le
vels
<Original Orientation>
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Original T
ype>
<Text>
<Text/Photo>
<Photo>
<2-Sided Original >
*1
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar T
ype>
<Sharpness>
Seven Levels
<Data Size>
<Small: Memory Priority>
<Standard>
<Large: Image Quality Priority>
<Subject/Message>
<Subject>
<Message>
<Reply T
o>
<None>
<Specify from Address Book>
<Priority>
<Lo
w>
Setting Menu List
539
<Standard>
<High>
<I-Fax Settings>
Specify the basic settings for using the machine as an I-Fax device.
<Change Default Settings (I-Fax)>
Y
ou can change the default settings used for sending I-Fax. The selected settings are used as the default
settings when scanning originals.
Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
<Scan Size>
<A4>
<A5R>
<B5>
<LGL>
<LTR>
<STMT>
<EXEC>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>
<LEGAL (Government)>
<LEGAL (India)>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>
<Density>
Nine Levels
<Original Type>
<Text>
<Text/Photo>
<Photo>
<2-Sided Original >
*1
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar T
ype>
<Sharpness>
Seven Levels
<Subject/Message>
<Subject>
<Message>
<Reply To>
<None>
<Specify from Address Book>
Setting Menu List
540
<TX Terminal ID>
Information such as the date and time of tr
ansmission and the e-mail address of the machine (sender
information) can be added as a header in transmitted documents. This information tells the recipient when
the I-Fax was sent and who sent it.
<Add TX Terminal ID>
<Off>
<On>
<Print Position>
<Inside Image Ar
ea>
<Outside Image Area>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <TX
T
erminal ID>
Select <On> in <Add TX Terminal ID> <Print Position> Select <Inside Image
Ar
ea> or <Outside Image Area>
<Apply>
<File Settings>
Change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder or FTP server.
<Change Default Settings (File)>
Y
ou can change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder or FTP server. The
selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning.
Changing the Default Settings for
Functions
(P. 175)
<Scan Size>
<A4>
<A5R>
<B5>
<L
GL>
<LTR>
<STMT>
<EXEC>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>
<LEGAL (Government)>
<LEGAL (India)>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>
<File Format>
<PDF>
<PDF (Compact)>
<PDF (Compact/OCR)>
<PDF (OCR)>
<Set PDF Details>
Setting Menu List
541
<PDF>/<PDF (Compact)>/<PDF (Compact/OCR)>/<PDF (OCR)>
<Encryption>
<None>
<Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
<Acr
obat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*1
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*1
<Digital Signatures>
<None>
<Top Left>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<JPEG>
<TIFF>
<Set TIFF Details>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<Density>
Nine Le
vels
<Original Orientation>
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Original T
ype>
<Text>
<Text/Photo>
<Photo>
<2-Sided Original>
*1
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar T
ype>
<Sharpness>
Seven Levels
<Data Size>
<Small: Memory Priority>
<Standard>
<Large: Image Quality Priority>
<Fax Settings>
*1
Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax de
vice.
Setting Menu List
542
<Change Default Settings (Fax)>
You can change the default settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default
settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 175)
<Resolution>
<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>
<200 x 400 dpi (Superne)>
<400 x 400 dpi (Ultr
ane)>
<Density>
Nine Levels
<2-Sided Original >
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar Type>
<Sharpness>
Seven Levels
<Off-Hook Alarm>
Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone or the optional handset
connected to the machine is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.
0 to 3
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Off-Hook Alarm> Select the
volume of the alert sound
<Apply>
<ECM TX>
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce
errors on received faxes, see <ECM RX>(P. 550) .
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <ECM TX> <On>
ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are
performed on both the sending and receiving devices.
Setting Menu List
543
Even when ECM is enabled, err
ors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks
and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.
<Set Pause Time>
*2
For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)," 0 is dialed rst and then a fe
w
seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing
"(international access code) - (country code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are
input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international
access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration
of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see step 4 on
Basic Operations for Sending
Fax
es(P. 216) .
1 to 4
to 15 (sec.)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Set Pause Time> Specify the
dur
ation of pause
<Apply>
<Auto Redial>
*2
Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the
rst attempt fails because the line is busy
. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval
between redials.
<Use Auto Redial>
<Off>
<On>
<Number of Times to Redial>
1 to 2 to 10 (time(s))
<Redial Interval>
2
to 99 (min.)
<Redial When Err
or Occurs>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Auto Redial> Select <On> in <Use
Auto Redial> Specify the settings <Apply>
<Number of Times to Redial>
Species ho
w many times the machine redials. Enter a number, and select <Apply>.
Setting Menu List
544
<Redial Interval>
Species the interval between r
edials. Enter a number for the interval, and select <Apply>.
<Redial When Error Occurs>
When set to <On>, species to redial when a transmission error occurs.
<Check Dial Tone Before Send>
*2
Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before
Send>
<On>
<Set Line>
Specify a fax number, unit name, and line type.
<Register Unit Tel. Number>
Register the fax number for the machine. Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81)
<Register Unit Name>
Register the name of a company or person ( Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 81) ). The
registered name is sent as sender information to the destination ( <TX Terminal ID>(P. 547) ).
<Select Line Type>
*2
Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
<Pulse>
<Tone>
<TX Start Speed>
If it takes a long time to start sending a fax, such as when there is a poor connection, you can adjust the
communication start speed do
wnward incrementally.
<33600 bps>
<14400 bps>
<9600 bps>
<7200 bps>
<4800 bps>
<2400 bps>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <TX Start Speed> Select the
communication start speed
Setting Menu List
545
<R-Key Setting>
If your machine is connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), it is necessary to set the access method.
If you set it to <PB
X>, the <R> key will be displayed on the Fax Basic Features screen. If you assign an outside
line access number to the <R> key, you can easily access the outside line.
<PSTN>
<PB
X>
*2
<Prex>
Prex Code
<Hooking>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <R-Key Setting> <PBX> Select
<Pr
ex> or <Hooking>
Enter an outside line access number if you select <Pr
ex>
<Apply>
<PBX>
Select <PB
X> when you want the machine to be connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange). Set the
function of the <R> key displayed on the Fax Basic Features screen to <Prex> or <Hooking>. If you select
<Prex>, register the prex code on the next screen. Enter the prex code using the numeric keys, select
<Pause>, and then select <Apply>. If you do not insert a pause, the prex code is not registered.
<Archive TX Document>
*3
In addition to the destination specied when the fax is sent, you can specify whether fax
ed documents are
also sent to a preset storage address for archiving.
Saving a Copy of a Sent Original(P. 234)
<Archive TX Document>
<Off>
<On>
<Ar
chive Address>
<Conrm Enter
ed Fax Number>
Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.
Conrming the Enter
ed Fax Number(P. 406)
Setting Menu List
546
<Off>
<On>
<Allow Fax Driver TX>
Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Restricting Fax Sending from a
Computer(P
. 406)
<Off>
<On>
<Restrict Sequential Broadcast>
Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in
succession. Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 406)
<Off>
<On>
<TX Terminal ID>
Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to
the fax header. The r
ecipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.
<Add TX Terminal ID>
<Off>
<On>
<Print Position>
<Inside Image Ar
ea>
<Outside Image Area>
<Mark Number As>
<Fax>
<Tel>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <TX Terminal ID> Select <On> in
<Add TX T
erminal ID>
Specify the settings <Apply>
<Print Position>
Species the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Ar
ea> to print
the information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image
area.
<Mark Number As>
Adds the "Fax" or "Tel" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine (
Registering the Fax
Number and Unit Name
(P. 81) ). Select <Tel> to indicate that the notied number is a telephone number.
Setting Menu List
547
<Receive/Forward>
1W2X-090
All the settings r
elated to receiving faxes and e-mails are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger (
).
<Common Settings>(P. 548)
<I-Fax Settings>(P. 549)
<Fax Settings>(P. 550)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
Settings marked with "
*2
" cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with "
*3
" have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
<Common Settings>
Specify oper
ations that are to be performed when faxes are received in memory and when the amount remaining in
the toner cartridge is low.
<Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox>
*1
Congure settings for r
eceiving faxes in memory.
<Fax Memory Lock Settings>
Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be
printed at any time by changing the setting to <Off>.
Saving Received Documents into the Machine
(Memory Reception)(P
. 236)
<Use Memory Lock>
<Off>
<On>
<Report Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Memory Lock Time>
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Memory Lock Start Time>
<Memory Lock End Time>
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>
If receiving faxes when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low, the machine holds them in memory
instead of printing. Ho
wever, if this function is enabled, the machine continues printing. In addition to fax
reception, this is true with I-Fax reception.
Setting Menu List
548
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Continue Print.
When Cart. Lo
w>
<On>
When this function is enabled, fax
es may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored,
you need to ask the sender to resend the document.
<I-Fax Settings>
Congur
e settings to print received I-Fax documents.
<Print on Both Sides>
*1
Specify settings for printing received documents on both sides of paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <I-Fax Settings> <Print on Both Sides>
<On>
<RX Print Size>
Specify the paper size to be used for printing.
<A4>
<LTR>
<L
GL>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>
<LEGAL (Government)>
<LEGAL (India)>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>
Setting Menu List
549
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <I-Fax Settings> <RX Print Size> Select
the paper size
<Fax Settings>
*1
Congur
e settings for receiving and forwarding faxes.
<Print on Both Sides>
Specify settings for printing received documents on both sides of paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Print on Both
Sides>
<On>
<ECM RX>
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce
errors on sent faxes, see <ECM TX>(P. 543) .
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <ECM RX> <On>
ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax de
vice because error check is
performed on both the sending and receiving devices.
Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check
and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.
<Incoming Ring>
*3
Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when <Auto>
or <Fax/T
el (Auto Switch)> is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings
when the machine receives a fax call. You can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from
ringing.
<Use Incoming Ring>
Setting Menu List
550
<Off>
<On>
<Number of Rings>
1 to 2 to 99 (time(s))
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Incoming Ring> Select
<On> in <Use Incoming Ring> Enter the desired number in <Number of Rings> <Apply>
When <On> is specied, you need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine
befor
ehand.
When <Off> is specied, the machine does not enter sleep mode.
<Remote RX>
*3
Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote
Reception). When a fax is sent to the machine, you can r
eceive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone
and entering a specic ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the
way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote Reception, see
Using a Telephone to Receive
Fax
es (Remote Reception)(P. 227) .
<Use Remote RX>
<Off>
<On>
<Remote RX ID>
00 to 25 to 99
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Remote RX> Select
<On> in <Use Remote RX> Enter the ID number in <Remote RX ID> <Apply>
<Switch to Auto RX>
Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specied time period. This
featur
e is only available when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be
received even when no one is available to pick up the handset.
<Use Switch to Auto RX>
<Off>
<On>
<Ring Time Until Auto RX>
1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)
Setting Menu List
551
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Switch to Auto
RX> Select <On> in <Use Switch to Auto RX> Enter the desired number of seconds in <Ring
Time Until Auto RX> <Apply>
<RX Start Speed>
If it takes a long time to start receiving a fax, such as when there is a poor connection, you can adjust the
communication start speed do
wnward incrementally.
<33600 bps>
<14400 bps>
<9600 bps>
<7200 bps>
<4800 bps>
<2400 bps>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <RX Start Speed> Select
the communication start speed
<Use Reduce RX Size>
Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio
that r
educes the received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list.
<Use Reduce RX Size>
<Off>
<On>
<Reduction Ratio>
<Auto>
<97%>
<95%>
<90%>
<75%>
<Reduction Dir
ection>
<Vertical/Horizontal>
<Vertical Only>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Use Reduce RX
Size> Select <On> in <Use Reduce RX Size> Specify each setting item <Apply>
Setting Menu List
552
<Reduction Ratio>
<Auto> r
educes the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%>, <95%>, <90%>, or
<75%> reduces the image by the corresponding ratio.
<Reduction Direction>
Select <Vertical/Horizontal> to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select <Vertical Only> to
reduce only vertically.
<Print RX Page Footer>
Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of
r
eceived faxes.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Print RX Page
Footer> <On>
<Forwarding Settings>
Specify settings for forwarding faxes.
<Forwar
ding Function>
*2
Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specied destination. In addition to a fax
number, you can also specify an e-mail address or a shared folder in a computer, etc. as the forwarding
destination.
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 238)
<Use Forwarding Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Forwar
ding Destination>
<Print Images>
Select whether to print forwar
ded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents
only when an error occurs.
Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 238)
<Off>
<On>
<Only When Error Occurs>
<Store Images in Memory>
Select whether to stor
e fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend
or print the documents later as necessary.
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be
Forwar
ded(P. 238)
<Off>
Setting Menu List
553
<Only When Error Occurs>
Setting Menu List
554
<Store/Access Files>
1W2X-091
All the settings r
elated to saving the scanned document to a USB memory device or printing stored les are listed with
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Common Settings>(P. 555)
<Memory Media Settings>(P. 562)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Common Settings>
Change the settings for le saving or memory media print.
<Scan and Stor
e Settings>
Congure settings for saving the scanned document to a USB memory de
vice.
<USB Memory Settings>
You can change the settings used when data is saved to a USB memory device.
<Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>
You can change the default settings used for saving scanned originals to a USB memory device. The
selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning originals.
Changing the Default
Settings for Functions
(P. 175)
<Scan Size>
<A4>
<A5R>
<B5>
<L
TR>
<LGL>
<STMT>
<EXEC>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>
<LEGAL (Government)>
<LEGAL (India)>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>
<File Format>
<PDF>
<PDF (Compact)>
Setting Menu List
555
<PDF (Compact/OCR)>
<PDF (OCR)>
<Set PDF Details>
<PDF>/<PDF (Compact)>/<PDF (Compact/OCR)>/<PDF (OCR)>
<Encryption>
<None>
<Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
<Acr
obat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
*
<Digital Signatures>
<None>
<Top Left>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<JPEG>
<TIFF>
<Set TIFF Details>
<Divide into Pages>
<Off>
<On>
<Density>
Nine Levels
<Original Orientation>
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Original T
ype>
<Text>
<Text/Photo>
<Photo>
<2-Sided Original>
*
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar T
ype>
<Sharpness>
Seven Levels
<Data Size>
<Small: Memory Priority>
<Standard>
<Large: Image Quality Priority>
<Access Stored Files Settings>
You can change the settings to print les in a USB memory de
vice and the method for displaying them.
Setting Menu List
556
<Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
Y
ou can change the default settings associated with memory media print. The settings congured here are
used as the default settings of the memory media print function.
Changing the Default Settings for
Functions
(P. 175)
<Paper>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Drawer 1>
<Drawer 2>
*
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<2-Sided Printing>
*
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar T
ype>
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
<Brightness>
Five Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<Original T
ype>
<Photo Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Halftones>
<Gr
adation>
<Error Diffusion>
< Set PDF Details>
<Brightness>
Se
ven Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Print Range>
<All Pages>
<Specied Pages>
<Enlar
ge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
<Off>
<On>
<Enlar
ge Print Area>
Setting Menu List
557
<Off>
<On>
<Print Comments>
<Off>
<Auto>
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
<Error Diffusion>
<Off>
<On>
<Resolution/Gr
adation>
*
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Gr
aphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gr
adation>
<Pure Black Text>
<Off>
<On>
<Black Overprint>
*
<Off>
<On>
<RGB Source Pr
ole>
<sRGB>
<Gamma 1.5>
<Gamma 1.8>
<Gamma 2.4>
<None>
<CMYK Simulation Pr
ole>
<JapanColor(Canon)>
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
<None>
<Use Grayscale Pr
ole>
<Off>
<On>
<Output Pr
ole>
<Text>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Gr
aphics>
<Normal>
Setting Menu List
558
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Image>
<Normal>
<Photo>
<TR Normal>
<TR Photo>
<Matching Method>
<Perceptual>
<Saturation>
<Colorimetric>
<Composite Overprint>
<Off>
<On>
<Gr
ayscale Conversion>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Print Quality>
<Density>
*
Y
ellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
17 Levels
<Fine Adjust>
<Yellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 levels
<Toner Save>
<Off>
<On>
<Gr
adation>
<High 1>
<High 2>
<Density Fine Adjustment>
Five Le
vels
<Resolution>
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Special Smoothing Mode>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Mode 5>
<Mode 6>
<T
oner Volume Correction>
<Standard>
<Gradation Priority>
Setting Menu List
559
<Text Priority>
<Line Contr
ol>
<Resolution Priority>
<Gradation Priority>
<Width Adjustment>
<Off>
<On>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Advanced Smoothing>
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Level 2>
<Apply to Gr
aphics>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to T
ext>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Gradation Smoothing>
<Gr
adation Smoothing>
<Off>
<Level 1>
<Le
vel 2>
<Apply to Graphics>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Apply to Images>
*
<Off>
<On>
<Default Display Settings>
Select Preview/Details as the method for displaying les in a USB memory device.
<Preview>
<Details>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings> <Default Display Settings> Select the method for displaying
<Preview>
Setting Menu List
560
Displays a preview image.
<Details>
Displays le names and dates in list form.
<File Sort Default Settings>
Select whether to display les in a USB memory de
vice in ascending or descending order of le name or date.
<Name (Ascending)>
<Name (Descending)>
<Date/Time (Ascending)>
<Date/Time (Descending)>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings>
<File Sort Default Settings> Select the order of les that ar
e displayed
<File Name Display Format>
Select whether to display short or long te
xt for le names that are stored in a USB memory device.
<Short File Name>
<Long File Name>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings> <File Name Display Format> Select <Short File Name> or <Long File Name>
<Short File Name>
Shortens a le name to as fe
w as eight characters. To distinguish les that have similar names, numbers such as
"
~
1" or "
~
2" are added at the end of the le names.
<Long File Name>
Displays a le name up to 40 characters.
The number of char
acters described above does not include the characters in le extensions, such as ".jpg."
Setting Menu List
561
<Memory Media Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable the functions of a USB memory device.
<Use Scan Function>
Select whether to permit storing scanned originals into a USB memory device. Restricting the Scan to USB
Function
(P. 409)
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
<Off>
<On>
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
<Off>
<On>
<Use Print Function>
Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine.
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 409)
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
<Off>
<On>
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
562
<Secure Print>
1W2X-092
Specify whether to enable or disable Secur
e Print (
Printing via Secure Print(P. 264) ). Default settings ar
e marked
with a dagger (
).
<Use Secure Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<Off>
<On>
<Secur
e Print Deletion Time>
10 to 30
to 240 (min.)
Setting Menu List
563
<Set Destination>
1W2X-093
All the settings r
elated to the address book are listed with descriptions.
<Address Book PIN>
Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book. Restricting
Use of the Addr
ess Book(P. 402)
Setting Menu List
564
<Management Settings>
1W2X-094
Item Description
<User Management>(P. 566) You can congur
e the settings for managing users of the machine.
<Device Management>(P. 567) You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as
various data r
equired when using the machine functions.
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>(P. 571)
You can congure the settings related to the Remote UI and software
available for the machine.
<Data Management>(P. 573) You can congur
e settings to utilize data such as machine settings data or
perform data initialization.
<Security Settings>(P. 575) You can congur
e the settings related to the user authentication function,
password, and encryption.
<Initialize All Data/Settings> Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 437)
Setting Menu List
565
<User Management>
1W2X-095
All the settings r
elated to user management of the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked
with a dagger (
).
<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 566)
<Department ID Management>(P. 566)
<System Manager Information Settings>
Specify the ID or PIN e
xclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network> and <Management
Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator.
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 351)
<System Manager ID and PIN>
Enter a number for the System Manager ID and PIN.
<System Manager ID>
<System Manager PIN>
<System Manager Name>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
<Department ID Management>
Select whether to use the Department ID Management, a featur
e that uses IDs as user accounts to specify access
privileges and maintain information on how the machine is used.
Setting the Department ID
Management(P
. 353)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <User Management> <Department ID
Management> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
566
<Device Management>
1W2X-096
All the settings r
elated to management of information for the hardware and operations, as well as about management
of data required when using the machine functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger (
).
<Device Information Settings>(P. 567)
<Select Country/Region>(P. 567)
<Display Job Log>(P. 568)
<Use NFC>(P. 568)
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 568)
<Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business>(P. 569)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with "
*2
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
Settings marked with "
*3
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items
<Device Information Settings>
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
<Device Name>
<Location>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Device Information
Settings> Select <Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering
T
ext(P. 132) )
<Apply>
<Select Country/Region>
*1 *2
Specify the country or r
egion where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
<Austria (AT)>
<Belarus (B
Y)>
<Belgium (BE)>
<Czech Republic (CZ)>
<Denmark (DK)>
<Egypt (EG)>
<Netherlands (NL)>
<Norway (NO)>
<Poland (PL)>
<Portugal (PT)>
<Russia (RU)>
<Saudi Arabia (SA)>
Setting Menu List
567
<Finland (FI)>
<Fr
ance (FR)>
<Germany (DE)>
<Greece (GR)>
<Hungary (HU)>
<Ireland (IE)>
<Italy (IT)>
<Jordan (JO)>
<Luxembourg (LU)>
<Slovenia (SI)>
<South Africa (ZA)>
<Spain (ES)>
<Sweden (SE)>
<Switzerland (CH)>
<Ukraine (UA)>
<Great Britain (GB)>
<Other>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Select Country/Region> Select
a country or r
egion
<Display Job Log>
Select whether to display the cop
ying, printing, faxing, and scanning logs on the display of the machine and in the
Communication Management Report.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Job Log> Select <Off>
or <On> Restart the machine
<Use NFC>
*3
Select whether to allo
w printing by touching an NFC-capable mobile device to the NFC mark on the machine's
operation panel.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Use NFC> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or T
oner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>
Setting Menu List
568
<Off>
<On>
<T
oner Status Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Consumables
Information (RUI/T
oner Status)>
Specify the settings
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the
Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing
toner cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
<Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business>
Select whether to allo
w scanning from a mobile device using the Canon PRINT Business application.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Specify whether to display a message pr
ompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the
machine.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
569
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
570
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>
1W2X-097
All the settings r
elated to the software and system options available for the machine as well as about Register License
are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Register License>(P. 571)
<Remote UI Settings>(P. 571)
<Update Firmware>(P. 572)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with "
*2
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Register License>
*1*2
Enter the license k
ey for a system option that can be used on the machine.
License Registration(P. 724)
<Remote UI Settings>
*1
Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web
browser.
<Remote UI>
Select whether to use the Remote UI ( Disabling Remote UI(P. 412) ). When using Remote UI, you can also
specify whether to use the TLS encrypted communication (
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for
TLS(P. 377) ).
<Use Remote UI>
<Off>
<On>
<Use TLS>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>
<Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI> Select <On> in <Use Remote UI> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Use TLS> <Apply> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
571
<Restrict Access>
Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a
common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 359)
<Off >
<On>
<Remote UI Access PIN>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e>
<Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access> <On> Enter the PIN <Apply>
Enter the PIN (Conrm) <Apply>
<Update Firmware>
*1
Select ho
w to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.
Updating the
Firmwar
e(P. 434)
<Via PC>
<Via Internet>
<Version Information>
Setting Menu List
572
<Data Management>
1W2X-098
The settings for utilizing the machine settings and for initializing data ar
e listed with descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger (
).
<Import/Export>(P. 573)
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>(P. 574)
<Initialize Key and Certicate>(P
. 574)
<Initialize Address Book>(P. 574)
<Initialize Menu>(P. 574)
Asterisks (
*
)
Settings mark
ed with "
*
" cannot be imported or exported.
<Import/Export>
*
Y
ou can use a USB memory device to import and export data in the Address Book and various settings of the machine.
<Import>
<Export>
Import
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export> <Import>
<Yes> Enter the password <Apply>
Export
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export> <Export>
Enter the password <Apply> Enter the password (Conrm) <Apply>
If the <Address Book PIN> screen appears
If a PIN has been set for the Addr
ess Book, the <Address Book PIN> screen appears during importing/
exporting. Enter the Address Book PIN and select <Apply>. Select <Skip> to cancel Address Book data
importing/exporting.
When import is executed
The machine automatically restarts after the import process has nished.
Setting Menu List
573
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey
Pr
og.>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Initialize Key and Certicate>
*
Select to r
estore [Key and Certicate Settings] and [CA Certicate Settings] to the factory defaults.
Initializing Key
and Certicate(P
. 436)
<Initialize Address Book>
*
Select to r
estore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults.
Initializing Address Book(P. 437)
<Initialize Menu>
*
Select to r
estore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately.
Initializing Menu(P. 436)
<Preferences>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Function Settings>
<Set Destination>
<Management Settings>
<Initialize All>
Setting Menu List
574
<Security Settings>
1W2X-099
All the settings r
elated to the authentication function and encryption are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are
marked with a dagger (
).
<Authentication/Password Settings>(P. 575)
<Encryption Settings>(P. 575)
<Authentication/Password Settings>
Y
ou can reinforce the security of the authentication function.
<Authentication Function Settings>
Congure the security functions for user authentication.
<Lock
out>
When a user has failed user authentication, specify whether to disable the user from temporarily logging in
to the machine (lockout). When <On> is selected, specify how many consecutive times failures are permitted
before lockout is activated and also the time required before a user can log in again after lockout.
<Enable Lockout>
<Off>
<On>
<Lockout Threshold>
1 to 10 (time(s))
<Lockout Period>
1 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings>
<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout> Select <On> in <Enable Lockout> Specify
each setting item <Apply> Restart the machine
This option is not applied to login using the department ID
.
<Encryption Settings>
Congur
e a setting for disabling a weak encryption or the key and certication using a weak encryption.
<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>
<Off>
<On>
<Pr
ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
575
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> Select <On>
in <Pr
ohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>
Select <Off> or <On> in <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>
<Apply> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
576
Maintenance
Maintenance .....................................................................................................................................................
578
Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 580
Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 581
Cleaning the Platen Glass ............................................................................................................................. 582
Cleaning the Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 583
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 586
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................... 588
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 589
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 594
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 595
Adjusting Image Quality ................................................................................................................................... 597
Adjusting Gradation ..................................................................................................................................... 598
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ................................................................................................................ 603
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility ............................................................................................ 604
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 606
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 608
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 610
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 615
Maintenance
577
Maintenance
1W2X-09A
This chapter describes upk
eep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.
Basic Cleaning
Regular Cleaning(P. 580)
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589) Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 594)
Consumables(P. 615)
Adjusting and Managing the Machine
Maintenance
578
Relocating the Machine(P. 595) Adjusting Image Quality(P. 597)
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 608) Printing Reports and Lists(P. 610)
Maintenance
579
Regular Cleaning
1W2X-09C
Regularly clean the machine to pr
event deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Cleaning the Exterior(P. 581)
Feeder
Cleaning the Feeder(P. 583)
Internal xing assembly and tr
ansfer belt
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 588)
Platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass
co
ver
Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 582)
Maintenance
580
Cleaning the Exterior
1W2X-09E
Regularly wipe the e
xterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that wer
e
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild deter
gent diluted with water.
To locate the ventilation slots, see
Front Side(P. 105) .
3
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
581
Cleaning the Platen Glass
1W2X-09F
Regularly wipe off the dust fr
om the platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover to prevent
smudges to be printed on originals or printouts.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
T
urning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,
documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are
not deleted.
2
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.
3
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover.
Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
4
Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
5
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
6
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
582
Cleaning the Feeder
1W2X-09H
Gr
aphite powder or dust on the rollers inside the feeder or on the document feed scanning area may cause smudges
to appear on printouts. If this occurs or if a paper jam occurs frequently, clean the feeder. If the problem persists after
cleaning the feeder, perform automatic feeder cleaning.
Cleaning the Feeder(P. 583)
Automatic Feeder Cleaning(P. 585)
Cleaning the Feeder
1
Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.
T
urning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,
documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are
not deleted.
2
Open the original supply tray.
3
Open the feeder cover.
4
Wipe the rollers in the feeder.
Wipe the r
ollers with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out. Then wipe with a dry cloth.
Maintenance
583
If
the rollers and surrounding areas are very dirty, clean them out. To do this, wet a cloth with water and
wring it out well, then wipe the dirty areas. Afterwards, wipe the areas with a soft and dry cloth.
5
Close the feeder cover and original supply tray.
6
Open the feeder.
7
Wipe the document feed scanning area.
Wipe with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out, and then wipe with a dry cloth.
8
Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
Maintenance
584
9
Gently close the feeder.
10
Plug the machine back into the power outlet and switch it on.
Automatic Feeder Cleaning
Automatic feeder cleaning uses paper loaded in the feeder. Set 10 sheets of plain A4 or US Letter size paper in the
feeder befor
e starting automatic cleaning.
Placing Originals(P. 136)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Feeder>.
4
Select <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, pr
ess
to return to the
Home scr
een.
Maintenance
585
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
1W2X-09J
If the xing assembly is dirty
, the printout may get smudged. To clean the xing assembly, perform the following
procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing assembly when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. To
clean the xing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose
tray before performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw(P. 586)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn(P. 587)
Prior to performing cleaning, mak
e sure that there remains a sucient amount remaining in the toner
cartridges.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 594)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Ther
e are two ways of cleaning, from which you should choose one depending on how the paper is smudged. To clean
the xing assembly, rst perform <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>. If this results in no effect,
then try <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)
Cleaning will be mor
e effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous printing
session.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>.
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, pr
ess
to return to the
Home scr
een.
When <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)> is complete, a sheet of blank paper is
ejected. If the symptom does not improve, then also perform <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
Maintenance
586
Clean Fixing Assembly
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, pr
ess
to return to the
Home scr
een.
When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Clean Fixing Assembly
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, pr
ess to return to the
Home screen.
When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.
Maintenance
587
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)
1W2X-09K
Dirt may adher
e to the transfer belt inside the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. To clean the transfer
belt, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents
waiting to be printed.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean ITB>.
4
Select <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When a message appears stating that cleaning is complete, pr
ess
to return to the
Home scr
een.
Maintenance
588
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
1W2X-09L
The machine displays a message when the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner
cartridges on the display (
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 594) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 589)
When Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 590)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 615) ) or r
eplace the current toner
cartridge with a new one (
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590) ).
<Pr
epare cartridge.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be r
eplaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
When cop
ying or printing, you can continue printing the original.
If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge when the machine is receiving a fax or
automatic report output is set, received faxes and reports will be stored in memory so that they do
not appear faded after they are printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner
cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <On>.
<Continue Print. When
Cart. Lo
w>(P. 548)
Specify when this message is displayed
You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message.
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>(P. 444)
<End of Cartridge Lifetime>
This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), noties you that a toner cartridge has r
eached
the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue
printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.
Maintenance
589
<Display Cartridge Replacement Steps>
Displays the pr
ocedure for replacing a toner cartridge.
<Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)>
You can continue printing, but the machine may malfunction.
When Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to sho
w any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner
Cartridge(P
. 590)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Une
ven
Partially faded
Uneven density
White Spots Appear
Toner smudges and splatters appear
Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When you r
eplace the toner cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.
See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.
1
Open the front cover.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Maintenance
590
2
Pull out the cartridge tray.
3
Pull the target toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.
4
Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing material.
1
Pull the tab of the packing material on a at place.
2
Pull out the toner cartridge.
Maintenance
591
5
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge.
Do not touch the surface of the drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge.
6
Install the toner cartridge.
Each toner cartridge color has its o
wn slot in the toner cartridge tray, and this tray is indicated with a
corresponding color label (
). Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.
The
bottom surface of the toner cartridge is exposed; therefore, be careful not to bump the toner
cartridge against the slot frame when inserting it into the slot.
7
Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.
Maintenance
592
Immediately after the fr
ont cover is closed, the quick adjustment (
Quick Adjust(P. 600) ) starts. T
o
perform adjustment for higher quality, perform full adjustment (
Full Adjust(P. 598) ).
LINKS
Consumables(P. 615)
Maintenance
593
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
1W2X-09R
Use the pr
ocedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check
whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Cartridge Information> Checking the amount
r
emaining in the toner cartridges
Amount Remaining in Cartridge
Displays the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their
lifetime before the toner runs out.
The displayed amount r
emaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the
actual amount.
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Consumables(P. 615)
Maintenance
594
Relocating the Machine
1W2X-09S
The machine is heavy
. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury.
1
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that wer
e
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustr
ation below.
Whether the cables with "
*
" ar
e connected depends on your environment.
If an optional handset is mounted on the machine, remove the handset from its mounting.
Power plug
Power cord
USB keyboard
*
USB cable
*
LAN cable
*
Handset
*
External telephone
*
Telephone cable
*
3
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
4
Pull out the paper drawer.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Maintenance
595
5
Close all the open covers and multi-purpose tray, and move the machine to a new
location.
The machine is heavy (
Main Unit(P. 700) ). If you ar
e using MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw, make
sure to move the machine with two or more people.
Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine. If you have attached the optional cassette feeding module,
leave the optional paper feeder on the oor and move it after moving the main unit of the machine.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
6
Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
For information about ho
w to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started."
Manuals and
Their Contents
(P. 726)
Maintenance
596
Adjusting Image Quality
1W2X-09U
If the print r
esults or scanned images are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color
mismatch, try the adjustments below.
Auto Adjust Gradation
If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to
improve color reproducibility. There are three types of adjustments: <Full Adjust>, <Quick Adjust>, and <Adjust Copy
Image>.
Adjusting Gradation(P. 598)
Corr
ect Print Color Mismatch
If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a
color mismatch.
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 603)
Black T
ext Processing for Color
You can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the
original that was scanned in color.
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility(P. 604)
Adjust Print Position
Y
ou can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.
Adjusting Print Position(P. 606)
Maintenance
597
Adjusting Gradation
1W2X-09W
Gr
adation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that
are printed, the more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of
printouts differs markedly from the originals, perform the appropriate auto adjustment. There are three types of
adjustments: "Full Adjust" for accurate adjustment, "Quick Adjust" for simple adjustment, and "Adjust Copy Image" for
gradation adjustment, especially for copying.
Full Adjust(P. 598)
Quick Adjust(P. 600)
Adjust Copy Image(P. 600)
Adjustments may not be performed effectively if ther
e is not sucient toner cartridge remaining. Check the
amount remaining in the toner cartridges. If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low, it is
recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Consumables(P
. 594)
Full Adjust
This adjustment optimizes r
eproducibility for color printing. When the machine performs full adjustment, it obtains
information to optimize color reproducibility. The machine maintains this information until the next time you perform
full adjustment. To make a full adjustment, repeat the operation, "print out the adjustment image and scan it,"
multiple times. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while performing some functions, including, scanning,
and printing.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust
Gr
adation>.
3
Select <Full Adjust>.
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
5
Conrm the pr
ocedure, and select <Start>.
An adjustment image is printed.
Maintenance
598
6
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover after the screen displayed during printing
disappears.
7
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.
Place the adjustment image with the print side facing do
wn and the black stripe toward the back side of the
machine.
8
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
9
Select <Start Scanning>.
The placed adjustment image is scanned, and then the second adjustment image is printed.
10
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover, remove the rst adjustment image, and
then place the second adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face
do
wn.
In the same way as for the rst adjustment image, place the adjustment image with the print side facing
do
wn and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.
11
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
12
Select <Start Scanning>.
The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.
13
When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder or
the platen glass co
ver, and remove the adjustment image.
14
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
If the <Could not perform correction.> message is displayed
Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper sour
ce?
Maintenance
599
Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face do
wn, with the black stripe toward the back side
of the machine?
Has a paper jam occurred?
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
Is the amount r
emaining in toner cartridge sucient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low,
it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Consumables(P
. 594)
Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty?
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 588)
Quick Adjust
This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquir
ed by <Full Adjust>. If the result of this adjustment is
not satisfactory, perform <Full Adjust>. This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner
cartridge.
Quick adjustment is not available while scanning or printing is performed.
Y
ou can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON.
<Auto
Corr
ection Settings>(P. 468)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust
Gr
adation>.
3
Select <Quick Adjust>.
4
Select <Start>.
The adjustment starts.
Adjust Copy Image
Use this adjustment when the appear
ance of copy is extremely different from that of the original. The adjustment
operation is to "print out the adjustment image and scan it." Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while
performing some functions such as scanning and printing.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust
Gr
adation>.
3
Select <Adjust Copy Image>.
Maintenance
600
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>.
5
Conrm the pr
ocedure, and select <Start>.
An adjustment image is printed.
6
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover after the screen displayed during printing
disappears.
7
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.
Place the adjustment image with the print side facing do
wn and the black stripe toward the back side of the
machine.
8
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
9
Select <Start Scanning>.
The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.
10
When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder or
the platen glass co
ver, and remove the adjustment image.
11
Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
If the <Could not perform correction.> message is displayed
Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper sour
ce?
Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side
of the machine?
Has a paper jam occurred?
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
Is the amount r
emaining in toner cartridge sucient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low,
it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.
Checking the Remaining Amount of
Consumables(P
. 594)
Maintenance
601
Is the tr
ansfer belt inside the machine dirty?
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 588)
Maintenance
602
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
1W2X-09X
Print color mismatch r
efers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple
toner cartridges. Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform
the following procedure. This adjustment is sometimes performed automatically, such as when toner cartridges are
replaced.
Y
ou can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON.
<Auto
Corr
ection Settings>(P. 468)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.
4
Select <Start>.
The adjustment starts.
Maintenance
603
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility
1W2X-09Y
Y
ou can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the
original that was scanned in color.
This function will apply when cop
y or scan is performed with <Original Type> set to other than <Printed
Image>/<Photo>.
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 203)
Adjusting Image Quality(P. 301)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Black Text Processing for Color>.
4
Adjust the value.
This adjustment value can be set independently in the feeder and platen glass.
<Color Text Priority>
Repr
oduces black or nearly black text in a color closely matching with the original.
<Black Text Priority>
Repr
oduces black text with enhanced clarity.
Maintenance
604
5
Select <Apply>.
Maintenance
605
Adjusting Print Position
1W2X-0A0
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable r
ange, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 to +5.0 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For
<Adjust V
ertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,
specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse
direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically
(Back Side)>
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust
Horizontally (Back Side)>
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Adjust Print Position>.
4
Select the paper source.
5
Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side.
Maintenance
606
6
Set an adjustment value.
7
Select <Apply>.
Adjusting the Print Position for All Print Jobs
Y
ou can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for
all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.5 mm increments
between -50.0 mm and +50.0 mm.
<Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>(P. 502)
Maintenance
607
Viewing the Counter Value
1W2X-0A1
Y
ou can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. These
totals include faxes, reports, and lists, in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers.
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
<Check Counter> Check the number of pages printed
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.
<123: T
otal (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in color.
<501: Scan (Total 1)>
Displays the total number of pages scanned.
<301: Print (Total 1)>
Displays the total number of pages printed.
<Monitoring Service> enables communication with a r
emote monitoring server. Execution of this item
enables information about the machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server
connected to the machine.
<Check Dev. Cong.> enables you to check the optional units installed on the machine.
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Check Counter> Check the number of pages
printed
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.
Maintenance
608
<123: Total (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in color.
<501: Scan (T
otal 1)>
Displays the total number of pages scanned.
<301: Print (Total 1)>
Displays the total number of pages printed.
Maintenance
609
Printing Reports and Lists
1W2X-0A2
Y
ou can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>
and machine settings.
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID(P. 610)
Setting Reports on the Communication Results(P. 610)
Printing Lists of Settings(P. 612)
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 613)
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID
Department ID Management Report
When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each
<Department ID> b
y printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can
better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that
the size and type of paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select
<Start>
Setting Reports on the Communication Results
Y
ou can print reports on the results of sending/receiving by e-mail, fax, and I-Fax, as well as results of saving to a
shared folder or FTP server. Some reports can be printed automatically while others are only printed when an error
occurs.
If "Result
" in a printed list contains "NG," you can check details of the error from a three-digit number
prexed with "#" displayed in the next to the result.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
Reports printed for e-mail/I-Fax indicate the tr
ansmission result between the machine and the mail server,
not between the machine and the destination address.
Communication Management Report
You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication
Management Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it
manually.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Communication Management
Report> Congur
e report settings
<Apply>
Maintenance
610
<Auto Print (40 Transmissions)>
Select <On> to print the r
eport automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print
the report automatically.
<Separate TX/RX>
Select <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.
Print the report manually
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Communication Management Report> Check that
the size and type of paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select
<Start>
Fax TX Result Report
You can check the fax logs of sent documents by printing a Fax TX Result Report. The report can be printed
either e
very time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Fax TX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only
When Error Occurs> Select <Off> or <On> <Apply>
<Include TX Image>
When you select <On>, a part of a sent document can be included in the TX Result Report.
E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report
You can check the e-mail and I-Fax logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder or FTP
server b
y printing an E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a
transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report> Select
<On> or <Only When Error Occurs>
Maintenance
611
Communication result
If an err
or occurs during transmission by e-mail/I-Fax or saving to a shared folder/FTP server, the
report does not show the error code. To check the error code, print a Communication Management
Report (
Communication Management Report(P. 610) ).
RX Result Report
You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be
printed either e
very time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <RX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only
When Error Occurs>
Printing Lists of Settings
Y
ou can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.
Address Book List
You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <Favorites>, and <Group>
b
y printing an Address Book List.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Address Book List> Select the setting you want to
print out Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <Start>
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 439) ) as well as the content that has been
r
egistered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the
rmware version, the paper size and type registered in the machine, and the print settings of Communication
Management Report, TX Result Report, and RX Result Report.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and
select <Start>
The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management
Settings. T
o check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.
Maintenance
612
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec
Policy List.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <IPSec Policy List> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine
Y
ou can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS
mode.
Eco Report
You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report
includes tips that ar
e useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
PCL Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
PS Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.
Maintenance
613
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PS Font List> Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Cartridge Log Report
You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and
type of paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Maintenance
614
Consumables
1W2X-0A3
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in
this machine. Pur
chase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
T
o handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.
Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner
cartridges.
T
oner Cartridges
Supplied T
oner Cartridges
The average yields
*
of the toner cartridges that come with the machine are shown in the table below.
*
The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Black: 2,200 sheets
Y (Y
ellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 1,200 sheets
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Black: 1,400 sheets
Y (Y
ellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 690 sheets
Replacement T
oner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
Average yield of toner cartridge
*
Canon Cartridge 046 Black 2,200 sheets
Maintenance
615
Canon Cartridge 046 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 046 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 046 Cyan
2,300 sheets
Canon Cartridge 046 H Black 6,300 sheets
Canon Cartridge 046 H Yellow
Canon Cartridge 046 H Magenta
Canon Cartridge 046 H Cyan
5,000 sheets
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
Average yield of toner cartridge
*
Canon Cartridge 045 Black 1,400 sheets
Canon Cartridge 045 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 045 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 045 Cyan
1,300 sheets
Canon Cartridge 045 H Black 2,800 sheets
Canon Cartridge 045 H Yellow
Canon Cartridge 045 H Magenta
Canon Cartridge 045 H Cyan
2,200 sheets
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
When r
eplacing toner cartridges, see
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589) .
Maintenance
616
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................
618
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 620
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 621
Copying/Printing Problems .......................................................................................................................... 625
Faxing/Telephone Problems ......................................................................................................................... 628
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 630
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 632
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 644
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 647
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 648
Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 649
Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 663
Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 673
Paper Jams in the Feeder .............................................................................................................................. 675
Paper Jams in the Main Unit ......................................................................................................................... 677
Paper Jams in a Paper Source ....................................................................................................................... 680
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 685
Troubleshooting
617
Troubleshooting
1W2X-0A4
When a pr
oblem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
Common Problems
This section describes how to take action when you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning.
Common
Pr
oblems(P. 620)
When Y
ou Cannot Print Properly
This section describes how to take action when printing results are not satisfactory or the paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 630)
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Err
or Code) is Displayed
This section describes how to take action when a message or error code (three digits) appears on the display.
A
Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Err
or Code) Is Displayed(P. 648)
Clearing Paper Jams
This section describes ho
w to take action when a paper is jammed.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 685) to nd out wher
e to contact.
Troubleshooting
618
Troubleshooting
619
Common Problems
1W2X-0A5
If you encounter pr
oblems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
If the machine is turned ON but does not r
espond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 726)
Are the phone cord, LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
Check whether these cables ar
e connected correctly. Use care not to mistake the phone cord's port for the
other cables' ports.
Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
Parts and Their Functions(P. 104)
Is sleep mode activated?
If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for po
wer
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press
.
Is any message displayed on the screen?
If a pr
oblem occurs, a message is displayed.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
If a pr
oblem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
Copying/Printing Problems(P. 625)
Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 628)
Troubleshooting
620
Installation/Settings Problems
1W2X-0A6
See Common Problems(P. 620) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 621)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 624)
Problem with the Print Server(P. 624)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wir
eless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
Ar
e <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 411)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 412)
If the machine is connected to a wir
eless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen and
that the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Home Screen(P. 123)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
If the machine is connected to a wir
ed LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
Ar
e you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to
set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 367)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 462)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 463)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 463)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
The IP addr
ess may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
When you connect the machine to a computer via wir
eless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 622)
Troubleshooting
621
You are unsure of the set IP address. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a
wir
eless LAN.
Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
Check whether the SSID is corr
ect.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
If the SSID of the wir
eless router is hidden (using a stealth mode
*
), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
*
A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other de
vices.
Check whether the machine is pr
operly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 622)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup
r
outer is connected to a network).
If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
Have the settings of the computer and the wir
eless router been completed?
Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
Is the wireless router turned on?
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Troubleshooting
622
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF
, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
Is the machine too far fr
om the wireless router?
Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wir
eless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection (
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27) ).
ANY connection r
efusal
*
is activated.
The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
The stealth mode is activated.
*
A function in which the wir
eless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wir
eless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
The MAC address packet ltering is set.
When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Troubleshooting
623
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
Change the USB cable. If you ar
e using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
Y
ou cannot nd the print server to connect to.
Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
Is the print server running?
Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
Is [Network discovery] enabled?
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 732)
Y
ou cannot connect to a shared printer.
On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 733)
Troubleshooting
624
Copying/Printing Problems
1W2X-0A7
See Common Problems(P. 620) also.
Printing/copy results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You
Cannot Print Pr
operly(P. 630)
You cannot print.
Can you print a Windo
ws test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 734)
If the pr
oblems persist, check the items that suit your operational environment.
Wireless LAN connection
Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
If the connection is poor, try the following.
- Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to
be at least ve channels apart.
- If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 739)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 737)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 44)
Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 367)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 462)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 463)
Disable security software and other resident software.
Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 78)
Troubleshooting
625
Can
you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Wired LAN connection
Have you selected the corr
ect port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 737)
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 367)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 462)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 463)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 463)
Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 78)
Can
you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
Have
you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer
driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 737)
Installing Drivers(P. 78)
Is bidir
ectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 738)
Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
Connect to another USB port on the computer.
Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
Can
you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server(P. 624)
Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 78)
Can
you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Are you printing with the lpr command? To continuously print PDF data using the lpr command, print jobs
one by one at intervals according to the <Timeout> setting.
<Timeout>(P. 503)
Has an err
or occurred? Check the job log.
Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 200)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 260)
Troubleshooting
626
Printing seems to be slow. *
Disabling Secur
e Print is recommended if you are not using it.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 266)
*
When the fr
ee space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
It takes a long time before printing starts.
Did you print to narr
ow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
Troubleshooting
627
Faxing/Telephone Problems
1W2X-0A8
See Common Problems(P. 620) also.
Sending Problems(P. 628)
Receiving Problems(P. 629)
Sending Problems
A fax cannot be sent.
Is an e
xternal phone line busy? Wait until the line becomes free.
Has an error occurred? Print and check a Communication Management Report.
Communication Management Report(P. 610)
Is a telephone line set corr
ectly?
Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 83)
When sending the fax o
verseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
A fax cannot be sent with a destination in the history specied.
Did you turn OFF the machine? If so, the stor
ed history was deleted.
Did you set <Restrict New Destinations> to <On>? If so, the history before you set was deleted.
Did you set <Restrict Resending from Log> to <On>? If so, the destinations in the history cannot be specied.
A fax cannot be sent on an optical ber line.
The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the
machine may not work corr
ectly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a
case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.
The results of a sent fax are not satisfactory.
Clean the platen glass or feeder. If cleaning does not impr
ove the results, the recipient's fax machine may be
a cause.
Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 582)
Cleaning the Feeder(P. 583)
Troubleshooting
628
Receiving Problems
The results of received fax are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When
Y
ou Cannot Print Properly(P. 630)
Telephone and fax cannot be switched automatically.
Check that the r
eceive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Answering Machine>, or <Net Switch>.
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Fr
ee space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 237)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 236)
A fax cannot be received automatically.
Check that the r
eceive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Auto>, <Answering Machine>, or <Net
Switch>.
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Fr
ee space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 237)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 236)
A fax cannot be received on an optical ber line.
The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the
machine may not work corr
ectly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a
case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.
Troubleshooting
629
When You Cannot Print Properly
1W2X-0A9
If printing r
esults are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Problems with Image Quality
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory(P. 632)
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Edge of Printouts(P
. 632)
Smudges Appear on
Printouts
(P. 633)
Afterimages Appear in Blank
Ar
eas(P. 634)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear
(P. 634)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 635) A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P
. 637)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Une
ven(P. 638)
Printouts Become Lightly
Color
ed(P. 639)
White Spots Appear(P. 640)
Troubleshooting
630
Spots Appear(P. 642) Reverse Side of Paper is
Smudged
(P. 642)
Pr
oblems with Printout Paper
Paper Creases or Curls(P. 644)
Paper Creases(P. 644) Paper Curls(P. 645)
Problems with Paper Feed Paper Is Fed Incorrectly(P. 647)
Printouts Are Skewed(P. 647) Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 647)
Troubleshooting
631
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
1W2X-0AA
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing r
esults. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst.
Regular
Cleaning
(P. 580)
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check
the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type. Also, set the paper size and type
correctly.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Do you print data without margins?
This
symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Do smudges appear on printouts when you perform continuous printing?
(MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
This
phenomenon may occur when you continuously print jobs containing many images with halftones
*
.
Change the setting of <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency
of regular cleaning is performed.
<Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>(P. 474)
*
Halftones used for table cells, gr
aphs, presentation materials backgrounds, photographs, etc.
If a higher le
vel is specied, the printing speed will be slower.
If the symptom does not improve after changing the setting of <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>, perform
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
Troubleshooting
632
This
operation will be more effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous
printing session.
Smudges Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Do smudges appear when using the machine in an environment with low
humidity
?
Set <Low Humidity Mode> to <On>.
<Low Humidity Mode>(P. 473)
If you set to <On>, print density may be lo
wer or uneven when the machine is used in an environment with
high humidity.
Is the machine installed in an envir
onment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
While
condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Troubleshooting
633
Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Is it time to replace the toner cartridge?
Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deterior
ated. Replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Do ghost images appear in the same page? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw /
MF732Cdw)
Change the setting for <Reduce Ghosting 1>. Setting to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Reduce Ghosting 1>(P. 473)
If you set to <On>, toner may not be x
ed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.
Do ghost images appear when you perform continuous printing?
Change the setting of <Reduce Ghosting 2>. Setting to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Reduce Ghosting 2>(P. 474)
If you set to <On>, print density may be une
ven.
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Troubleshooting
634
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check
how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Printouts Are Faded
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
Check
how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check
usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Ar
e you using paper containing much paper dust? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw /
MF732Cdw)
Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Corr. Img.
Corrup. by Ppr Dust> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Corr. Img. Corrup. by Ppr Dust>(P. 477)
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
Troubleshooting
635
Ar
e printouts faded immediately after toner cartridge replacement?
Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case,
setting <Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.>(P. 480)
If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with ne
xt replacement of toner cartridges.
Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly
distributed inside the cartridge.
Is the print faded or une
ven in density depending on the paper type or the
environmental conditions? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
Change the setting for <Reduce Toner Flaking>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Reduce Toner Flaking>(P. 478)
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.
Ar
e you using the machine in an environment with high humidity? (MF735Cx /
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
Setting <Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2> to <Mode 2> may solve the problem.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2>(P. 479)
If you set to <Mode 2>, printouts may be curled.
Is the machine installed in an envir
onment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
While
condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Troubleshooting
636
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
This
symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
If the paper guides ar
e too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Is the machine installed in an envir
onment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
While
condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Troubleshooting
637
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Is the platen glass dirty?
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.
Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 582)
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
Check
how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Is it time to replace the toner cartridge?
Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deterior
ated. Replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Is the print faded or une
ven in density depending on the paper type or the
environmental conditions? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
Change the setting for <Reduce Toner Flaking>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Reduce Toner Flaking>(P. 478)
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.
Troubleshooting
638
Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
Change the setting for <High Humidity Mode>. Setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<High Humidity Mode>(P. 473)
If
you set to <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may
be blurry.
Ar
e you using paper containing much paper dust? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw /
MF732Cdw)
Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Corr. Img.
Corrup. by Ppr Dust> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Corr. Img. Corrup. by Ppr Dust>(P. 477)
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
Is the machine installed in an envir
onment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
While
condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Printouts Become Lightly Colored
Troubleshooting
639
Does the original have background color, is it stained, or are you copying an
original such as a ne
wspaper that is printed on thin paper so that text or images
on the other side are visible through the paper?
Check the original and then adjust the density to the correct settings.
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check
how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Are white areas lightly colored?
Change the setting of <Pr
event Fogging>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Prevent Fogging>(P. 477)
If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.
White Spots Appear
Ar
e you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Ar
e you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
Check
how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
Troubleshooting
640
Is it time to r
eplace the toner cartridge?
Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. Replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 589)
When performing 2-sided printing, does void occur in the leading edge of
paper? (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
When
performing 2-sided printing on thin paper, void may occur on the back side of paper in the leading
edge. Setting <Corr. Void on Paper Back Side> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Corr. Void on Paper Back Side>(P. 476)
If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
Does void occur in the leading edge of paper? (MF635Cx / MF633Cdw /
MF631Cn)
When
printing on thin paper, void may occur in the leading edge of paper. Setting <Correct Void> to <On>
may solve the problem.
<Correct Void>(P. 476)
If you set to <On>, printouts may be faded.
Does une
ven print density occur in a way that the print looks like a water
drops pattern?
Setting <Drop Pattern Reduction Mode> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Drop Pattern Reduction Mode>(P. 476)
If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.
Is the machine installed in an envir
onment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 482)
While
condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
Troubleshooting
641
The setting for <Auto Shutdo
wn Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Spots Appear
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
If
cleaning the xing assembly does not solve the problem, setting <Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1> to <On>
may solve the problem.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 1>(P. 479)
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged
Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?
Check to make sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
Troubleshooting
642
Do smudges appear on printouts when you perform continuous printing?
(MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
This
phenomenon may occur when you continuously print jobs containing many images with halftones
*
.
Change the setting of <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency
of regular cleaning is performed.
<Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>(P. 474)
*
Halftones used for table cells, gr
aphs, presentation materials backgrounds, photographs, etc.
If a higher le
vel is specied, the printing speed will be slower.
If the symptom does not improve after changing the setting of <Regularly Clean Fix. Assembly>, perform
<Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
This
operation will be more effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous
printing session.
Do smudges appear on 2-sided printed paper? (MF635Cx / MF633Cdw /
MF631Cn)
When
performing 2-sided printing, the image may be blurry on the back side of paper in the trailing edge.
Setting <Correct Blurry Image> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Correct Blurry Image>(P. 477)
If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo
wer.
Troubleshooting
643
Paper Creases or Curls
1W2X-0AC
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
If paper is not loaded belo
w the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
Replace with appr
opriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Does this pr
oblem occur when printing on plain paper or thin paper?
(MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
Change the setting of <Paper Wrinkle Correction>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>(P. 471)
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
Does this pr
oblem occur when printing on envelopes or thin paper?
(MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn)
Change the setting of <Paper Wrinkle Correction>. <Mode 1> is effective for envelopes. <Mode 2> provides
stronger improvement, and is effective for envelopes and thin paper. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>(P. 471)
Troubleshooting
644
When <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> is specied, printed images may be blurry
.
Paper Curls
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check
usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Change
the setting of <Paper Curl Correction>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Paper Curl Correction>(P. 472)
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
Reload the paper by changing the side to print on (front side/back side).
In
rare cases the symptom may become worse depending on the paper. If this occurs, change the side to
print on back to the previous side.
Ar
e you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Change
the setting of <Paper Type> to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is
<Plain 1>, change it to <Plain L>.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Available Paper(P. 705)
Change
the setting of <Paper Curl Correction>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Paper Curl Correction>(P. 472)
Setting a gr
eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.
Troubleshooting
645
Ar
e you using the machine in an environment with high humidity? (MF735Cx /
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw)
Setting <Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2> to <Mode 1> may solve the problem.
<Reduce Toner Fixing Stain 2>(P. 479)
If you set to <Mode 1>, printouts may be faded.
Troubleshooting
646
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
1W2X-0AE
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
If the paper guides ar
e too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
Fan the paper stack thor
oughly so that paper is not stuck together.
Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Check
whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Check whether mix
ed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
Troubleshooting
647
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error
Code) Is Displayed
1W2X-0AF
When a message appears on the machine
's display, or a number (error code) prexed with "#" appears, see the
following sections to check the solution.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 649)
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 663)
Troubleshooting
648
Countermeasures for Each Message
1W2X-0AH
If you cannot send a fax or the memory is full, or you encounter oper
ation problems, a message appears on the
display. Find out more information about messages in the following list.
A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use. The amount in the
cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 615)
An error occurred during certicate verication.
The certicate has e
xpired, or contains incorrect information.
Install the correct CA certicate.
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 386)
Check the certicate for validity period and domain name in the DNS settings.
Black & White copying is restricted. Only Color copying is available.
Black and white copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
T
o copy in black and white, log in using a Department ID for which black and white copying is not
restricted. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Black & White printing is restricted. Only Color printing is available.
Black and white printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
T
o print in black and white, log in using a Department ID for which black and white printing is not
restricted. Contact your Administrator for the Department ID and PIN.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.
The authentication server certicate may be invalid, or the certicate may be in a format that the
printer does not support.
Check the authentication server certicate.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Troubleshooting
649
Cannot change the destination type of destinations registered to a group.
A selected destination could not be edited because it was registered to Group Dial.
To change the type of destination that is registered to Group Dial, rst delete the registered destination
from Group Dial. Next, change the destination type, and then register the destination to Group Dial again.
Cannot nd the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specic period of time.
Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)
An SSID or network k
ey of a wireless router was entered manually, but the entry was incorrect.
Check the SSID and network key, and enter the correct ones again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
A wir
eless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
If the pr
oblem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cannot print RX data.
Received documents cannot be printed due to some specic situation.
Check
if there has occurred one of the following situations. If messages including causes and solutions
appear on the display, check the contents.
A cover is open.
There is no paper loaded.
The paper is jammed.
The toner cartridge is consumed.
An error has occurred.
Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.
The recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
Ask the sender to send the fax again. If you hear a beep, select <Start Receiving> to r
eceive the fax.
Receiving Faxes(P. 225)
Troubleshooting
650
Cannot send because more than one destination is specied.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations is disabled.
To specify multiple destinations, you need to set <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> to <Off>. For more
information, contact your Administrator.
Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 406)
Cannot specify group destinations, or multiple destinations at the same
time.
You specied multiple destinations or Gr
oup Dial after selecting <Hook>.
After you select <Hook>, you cannot specify multiple destinations or Group Dial. Specify destinations
without selecting <Hook>, and send fax documents.
Cannot specify group destinations when on-hook.
Group Dial was specied as a destination after selecting <Hook>.
Once
you select <Hook>, you cannot specify destinations in Group Dial. Specify destinations to send fax
documents without selecting <Hook>.
Cannot use these settings. Sending to the specied destination is r
estricted.
The machine is set up so that the user currently logged in cannot send to the addresses registered in the
selected <Favorite Settings>.
Change the send r
estrictions for the logged in user.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Cartridge Communication Error A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be
in use.
A toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
Re-install
the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon pr
oduct.
Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 615)
Troubleshooting
651
Change the authentication password.
The password has expired.
Set a new password.
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
Check
that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Color copying is restricted. Only Black & White copying is available.
Color copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
T
o copy in color, log in using a Department ID for which color copying is not restricted. Contact your
Administrator for the Department ID and PIN.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Color printing is restricted. Only Black & White printing is available.
Color printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
T
o print in color, log in using a Department ID for which color printing is not restricted. Contact your
Administrator for the Department ID and PIN.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Copying is restricted.
Copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log
in with a Department ID for which copying is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact
your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Could not connect.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
W
ait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briey.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
Troubleshooting
652
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the
access point has been r
eached.
The machine attempted to connect to a wireless LAN router to which the maximum number of devices
wer
e already connected.
Decrease the number of devices (clients) that are connected to the wireless LAN router. For information on
the maximum number of devices that can connect, see the instruction manual for the wireless LAN router
or contact the manufacturer.
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
then congur
e the settings again.
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
Restart the machine and set again.
If
the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
If
the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congure the settings
again.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
W
ait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Troubleshooting
653
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
Mobile device detection was not possible within the predetermined length of time.
Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
Remo
ve the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
Cleaning the Feeder(P. 583)
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 586)
The amount r
emaining in toner cartridges required for cleaning the xing assembly is insucient.
Cleaning requires sucient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform the
cleaning again.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
Could not perform correction.
Appropriate paper that is required for correction is not loaded in a paper drawer.
Load the paper matching the paper specication displayed on the scr
een into the paper drawer.
Full Adjust(P. 598)
Adjust Copy Image(P. 600)
An adjustment image that is r
equired for correction is not placed on the platen glass correctly.
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down and the black stripe toward
the back side of the machine.
Full Adjust(P. 598)
Adjust Copy Image(P. 600)
Paper jammed during corr
ection.
Remove the jammed paper, and perform correction again.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
The amount r
emaining in toner cartridges required for correction is insucient.
Corrections require sucient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform
correction again.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 590)
The tr
ansfer belt inside the machine is dirty.
Perform automatic cleaning of the transfer belt.
Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 588)
Troubleshooting
654
Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the WEP settings.
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Open System>, but that of a wireless router is set to
"Shared Key."
Connect again by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Shared Key>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
The MAC address of the machine is rejected because the MAC address lter is set at a wireless router.
Set the wireless router to permit the MAC address of the machine and your computer. For more
information about how to set, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer. To check the MAC address of the machine, select <Menu> <Preferences>
<Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> <Connection Information>.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network k
ey (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
Connect
again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shar
ed Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.
Establish Dir
ect Connection again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 325)
End of Cartridge Lifetime
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Select one of the settings on the display
.
Troubleshooting
655
T
o display the replacement method, select <Display Cartridge Replacement Steps> on the screen.
If you select <Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)>, you can continue printing, but the
machine may malfunction.
Faxing is restricted.
Faxing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log
in with a Department ID for which faxing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your
Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Google Cloud Print Authentication Error
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
Check whether the date and time settings ar
e correctly specied.
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 446)
Google Cloud Print Communication Error
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
Check whether the machine is corr
ectly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
A
port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 375)
Load paper.
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Paper on which r
eports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
Load appropriate paper for printing reports or lists, and make settings for paper size and paper type.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Available Paper(P. 705)
Paper on which r
eceived documents can be printed is not loaded.
Troubleshooting
656
Load
appropriate paper for printing the received document, and make settings for paper size and paper
type.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
Available Paper(P. 705)
If you print r
eceived documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be
missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.
Memory Full (Secure Print)
Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed.
Print the secur
ed documents that are stored in memory.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 264)
Memory Full (Skip Error)
The memory became full of print data that could not be printed due to errors.
Cancel
printing of documents to which an error has occurred, or print the documents by selecting <Skip
Error> on the screen for checking the printing status.
Canceling Prints(P. 258)
Memory Media Print is restricted.
The function that prints les in a USB memory de
vice is disabled.
Set <Use Print Function> in <Memory Media Settings> to <On>.
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 409)
No reply from the destination.
A LAN cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
Check the status of the LAN cables and switches.
No response from the host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)
Troubleshooting
657
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 673)
Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
T
o use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 159)
If printing fr
om a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Check that the paper guides in the paper dr
awer are set in the correct position.
Loading Paper(P. 140)
Prepare cartridge.
Toner cartridge replacement time is near.
Mak
e sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this
message before you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 615)
Printing is restricted.
Printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log
in with a Department ID for which printing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact
your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Remote scanning is restricted.
Scanning that is operated by using a computer is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Troubleshooting
658
Log
in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of Department ID Management,
and select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Scanning is restricted.
Scanning is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log
in with a Department ID for which scanning is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact
your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key and certicate, user name and passwor
d, or CA certicate) is
not set correctly.
Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key and certicate, user name
and password, and CA certicate).
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X authentication has not been congur
ed correctly.
Congure the IEEE 802.1X correctly from the Remote UI.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.
Only destinations that are registered in the Address Book can be specied to send a fax or e-mail.
T
o enter a new destination with the operation panel, or add or edit it in the Address Book, you need to set
<Restrict New Destinations> to <Off>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P
. 404)
The authentication server certicate has e
xpired.
The server certicate sent fr
om the RADIUS server has expired.
Check the valid period of the server certicate on the RADIUS server.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Troubleshooting
659
The authentication server certicate is incorrect.
There is no CA certicate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication server
certicate.
Check that there is a CA certicate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication
server certicate.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 395)
The computer is restricted.
Scanning that is operated on the operation panel is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log
in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of the corresponding
Department ID, and select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 353)
The memory is full.
A fax could not be sent or received, or an original could not be scanned due to insucient memory
space.
If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
If a r
eceived document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 236)
If sending an original with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
If sending a fax, r
educe the resolution to scan the original.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
If scanning, change the le format to r
educe its le size.
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
A scanned original could not be stor
ed to a USB memory device due to insucient memory space.
Delete unnecessary data to free space in the USB memory device, or connect a different USB memory
device.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
The memory is full. Enter the original type settings again.
An original could not be scanned because memory became full during copying.
Set <Original T
ype> to <Text/Photo/Map (Speed)>, and copy.
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 203)
Troubleshooting
660
The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?
An original could not be scanned due to insucient memory space.
Select whether to print the pages that were scanned or cancel the job.
Copy the original in two or more parts.
Not all of the pages could be scanned during sorting and copying.
Select whether to print the pages that were scanned or cancel the job.
If this is a copy job, either copy the original in two or more parts or change the <Original Type> setting to
<Text/Photo/Map> and then copy the original.
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 203)
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
Check
the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
The USB memory is restricted.
The function that stores a scanned original to a USB memory device is disabled.
Set <Use Scan Function> to <On>.
Restricting the Scan to USB Function(P. 409)
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network k
ey (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shar
ed Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)
Troubleshooting
661
Change
the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
Check whether [Login Name] is set corr
ectly.
Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
If using TLS, check whether a "key and certicate" is registered.
If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 395)
Troubleshooting
662
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
1W2X-0AJ
If an err
or occurs such as when printing is not successful or when you cannot send or receive a fax or scanned
original, the corresponding error code is displayed in a report or in the job log screen as a three-digit number. Check
the following to nd out causes and solutions for each error code. For how to print an error report and information in
the report, see
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 610) . For details of the job log scr
een, see
<Status Monitor>
Scr
een(P. 126) .
#001
An original jams in the feeder.
Remo
ve the jammed original.
Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 675)
#003
A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data size.
When sending a fax: Reduce the r
esolution, and scan the original.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
When
receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the original into multiple sections or reduce the resolution
before sending.
#005
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
When
the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to
check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
#012
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine ran out of paper.
Troubleshooting
663
Ask the r
ecipient to reload the paper.
#018
A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did not respond because the line was busy or for
other r
easons.
When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to
check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
#022
Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled.
T
o send a fax from a computer, you need to set <Allow Fax Driver TX> to <On>. For more information,
contact your Administrator.
Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 406)
A fax could not be forwar
ded because the specied destination was deleted from the Address Book.
Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that failed to be forwarded remain in
memory, you can forward it again.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 238)
#037
A document could not be sent because the memory was full.
If a job queued, wait until the job is completed.
If a r
eceived document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 236)
If sending an original with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
If sending a fax, r
educe the resolution to scan the original.
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
PC faxing failed because the number of destinations specied for simultaneous tr
ansmission exceeded
the maximum value.
Clear the [Set the number of destinations that can be specied at once to 2000] check box in the fax driver.
Open the printer folder (
Displaying the Printer Folder(P
. 732) )
Right-click the fax driver icon for
this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Detailed Settings]
The le is too lar
ge to print.
Optimize the le to reduce the size or divide the le into sections, and then proceed to printing again.
Try printing from the printer driver. This may work well.
Troubleshooting
664
#099
An operation that caused a job to be canceled has been performed.
When you cancel a job, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive
documents again as necessary.
#401
A scanned original could not be stored to a USB memory device due to insucient memory space.
Delete
unnecessary data to free space in the USB memory device, or connect a different USB memory
device.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
#406
A scanned document could not be stored to a USB memory device due to an error.
Remo
ve the USB memory device, and connect it again.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
Reduce the number of originals to scan.
#408
Read failed because the USB memory device was removed while data was being read from it.
Check that the USB memory de
vice has not been removed and then read the data again.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
The connected USB memory de
vice is using an unsupported format.
Check that the USB memory device is using a format supported by this machine.
Insert a USB Memory Device(P. 107)
#701
Authentication failed because an incorrect Department ID or PIN was entered when the Department ID
Management was activated.
Enter the corr
ect Department ID and PIN.
Continuing operating without entering a Department ID was attempted even though unknown-ID jobs
(functions that permit operations without a Department ID and PIN) were disabled in the Department ID
Management.
Enable unknown-ID jobs in System Manager Mode in Remote UI.
Troubleshooting
665
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 357)
#703
Data could not be written because the memory space that was allocated for images was full when
sending an e-mail/I-Fax or storing to a shar
ed folder/FTP server.
If another sending document is queued, wait for a while until it is completed, and send again.
Divide the document into multiple sections before sending.
Delete the documents that are stored in memory.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
#751
The FTP server has not been started up or a network connection has been cut.
(Failur
e to connect to the destination is sometimes caused by a disconnection en route.)
Check the destination.
Check the network status.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)
The IP addr
ess was not set correctly.
Check <TCP/IP Settings>.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
#752
E-mail sending or I-Fax sending/receiving was impossible because an incorrect SMTP/POP3 server name
was set.
Check the SMTP/POP3 server name, and corr
ect the setting.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P
. 87)
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
E-mail sending or I-Fax sending/receiving was impossible because an incorrect domain name was set.
Check the domain name, and correct the setting.
Conguring DNS(P
. 56)
E-mail sending or I-Fax sending/receiving was impossible because the machine was not connected to a
network correctly.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
#753
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail, not sent/received as I-Fax, or not stored in the shared
folder/FTP server because the LAN cable is disconnected.
Troubleshooting
666
Check whether the LAN cable is connected corr
ectly.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)
#755
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or I-Fax nor stored in the shared folder or FTP server because
T
CP/IP was not working correctly.
Check <TCP/IP Settings>, and set correctly.
<Network>(P. 451)
An IP addr
ess is not set.
Set the IP address correctly.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)
The machine cannot communicate with de
vices on a network immediately after the machine starts up
because the waiting time for the start of the communication is set.
The machine cannot start communicating immediately after it is turned ON. Wait until the set time for
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup> passes after turning ON the machine, and send again.
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 55)
#766
The certicate has e
xpired.
Update the certicate or use a certicate that has not expired.
Check that the <Current Date/Time Settings> are correct.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 12)
#801
When communicating with an SMTP server to send an e-mail/I-Fax, a timeout error occurred from the
server.
Check whether SMTP is running on the network corr
ectly.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 621)
When communicating with the SMTP server, an err
or returned from the server.
Check whether the SMTP server is set correctly.
A destination is not set correctly.
Check whether the destination is set correctly.
When storing a scanned original into the shared folder, an error occurred from the folder.
Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly.
The incorrect folder name or password was specied when storing to the shared folder.
Check the destination settings.
Troubleshooting
667
#802
The SMTP/POP3/FTP server name is not set correctly.
Set the SMTP/POP3/FTP server name correctly.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 87)
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings(P. 90)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
#804
No access privileges to access the shared folder/FTP server are granted.
Assign
the privilege for writing data to the storage folder to the sender (user name registered in the
destination). For details, contact your Network Administrator.
The incorrect folder name was specied when storing to the shared folder/FTP server.
Check the destination settings.
#806
When storing data to a shared folder/FTP server, an incorrect user name or password was specied.
The
same user name and password as those registered in a shared folder/FTP server must be registered in
the Address Book.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 95)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
When sending an e-mail/I-Fax, an incorr
ect destination was specied.
Enter the correct e-mail address, and send the message again. If the destination that was registered in the
Address Book was used, check whether the e-mail address is correct.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
#808
An error or timeout occurred on the FTP server.
Check the FTP server settings.
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
#810
An error has been returned from the POP3 server when sending an e-mail or sending/receiving I-Fax.
Check whether the POP3 server is set corr
ectly.
Troubleshooting
668
Check
whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your
Network Administrator.
#813
The login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server is not set correctly.
Corr
ectly enter the login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server.
#816
The number of print pages has reached the upper limit specied for the department.
T
o reset the print page count, click [Clear Count] on the [Department ID Management] page of Remote UI.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 353)
#818
The received data is in a le format that the machine cannot print.
Contact the other party and ask them to r
esend the data in a different le format.
#819
The received data is not supported (incorrect MIME information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then r
esend the data.
#820
The received data is not supported (incorrect BASE64 or uuencode information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then r
esend the data.
#821
The received data is not supported (a TIFF analysis error occurred).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then r
esend the data.
#822
An le in a USB memory de
vice could not be printed because the format of the le is not supported.
Troubleshooting
669
Check the supported le formats and save the le again.
Printer Functions(P. 713)
#827
The received data is not supported (includes unsupported MIME information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then r
esend the data.
#829
The received data exceeds the maximum receivable size.
In
fax reception, the machine deletes the data for page 1,000 onwards and either prints the rst 999 pages
or holds them in memory. Get the sender to resend page 1,000 onwards.
In I-Fax reception, the machine cannot receive the e-mail if its size exceeds 24 MB. Ask the sender to
reduce the size of the e-mail down to under 24 MB and try resending.
#839
A user name and password that are used for SMTP authentication are not set correctly.
Set the user name and passwor
d correctly.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P
. 87)
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
#841
When sending an e-mail/I-Fax, an encryption algorithm that is common to the mail server is not present.
Clear the [Use TLS for SMTP]/[Use TLS for POP] check bo
x.
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
Add the common encryption algorithm to the mail server settings.
A TLS server certicate verication error has occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is registered to
the machine by using the Remote UI.
Check that the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is valid.
Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed one.
#844
TLS encrypted communication to a POP3 server failed when sending an e-mail with POP before SMTP.
Check the TLS encrypted communication settings in the POP3 server.
Troubleshooting
670
Clear
the [Use TLS for POP] check box. If the problem persists, clear the [Use POP Authentication Before
Sending] check box, and set the communication setting to a setting other than POP before SMTP.
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
When verifying an TLS server certicate to communicate to the POP3 server, a verication error
occurred.
Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is registered to
the machine by using the Remote UI.
Check that the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is valid.
Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed certicate.
#846
An e-mail or I-Fax could not be sent due to a POP authentication failure.
Check the setting, and try again.
Conguring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
(P. 90)
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
Check whether the po
wer plug is inserted into an outlet rmly.
#853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing
capability
.
The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per
printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to
print, check the document data for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error
code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
A secured document that was left unprinted was deleted.
If the secured document is not printed within a specic period of time (30 minutes by default), it is deleted
from memory. Send the secured document again, and print it within the period.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 264)
Printing using Secur
e Print was attempted when Secure Print was restricted.
When <Secure Print> is set to <Off>, you cannot use Secure Print. Set the setting to <On> and print again.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 264)
Print without using Secur
e Print.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
Y
ou tried to print a le that is either corrupted or not supported.
Troubleshooting
671
Check the le and try again.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
Passwor
d protected PDF les could not be printed.
Enter the correct password for the PDF le.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 267)
#861
A document could not be printed because a printer driver that was not intended for this machine was
used.
Print again b
y using the printer driver for this machine.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 256)
A document could not be printed due to a defect in its data.
Check the document data for any defects.
#863
An error occurred when printing from a computer.
T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. After the restart is complete, try
printing again.
#995
A document waiting to be sent or received was canceled.
Send or r
eceive the document again as necessary.
Troubleshooting
672
Clearing Paper Jams
1W2X-0AK
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the scr
een. Select <Next> to display simple solutions. If it is dicult
to understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Feeder
Paper Jams in the
Feeder
(P. 675)
Output tr
ay
Paper Jams in the
Main Unit(P
. 677)
Multi-purpose tr
ay/
Paper drawer
Paper Jams in a
Paper Sour
ce(P. 680)
Back side
Paper Jams in the
Main Unit(P
. 677)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Feeder
Paper Jams in the
Feeder
(P. 675)
Output tr
ay
Paper Jams in the
Main Unit(P
. 677)
Manual feed slot/
Paper dr
awer
Paper Jams in a
Paper Sour
ce(P. 680)
Back side
Troubleshooting
673
Paper Jams in the
Main Unit(P
. 677)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
T
urning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed. Be especially careful when receiving fax
documents.
If paper tears
Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.
Available Paper(P. 705)
Check that no jammed paper fr
agments remain in the machine.
Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine
Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 685)
Troubleshooting
674
Paper Jams in the Feeder
1W2X-0AL
If ther
e are originals placed in the feeder, remove them rst. Then, follow the procedure below. Do not forcibly remove
jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
1
Remove the jammed original from the feeder cover.
1
Open the feeder cover.
2
Gently pull out the original.
3
Lift the original tray, and gently pull out the original.
4
Close the feeder cover.
2
Remove the jammed original from the underside of the feeder.
1
Open the feeder.
Troubleshooting
675
2
Gently pull out the original.
3
Gently close the feeder.
3
Place the original again.
Troubleshooting
676
Paper Jams in the Main Unit
1W2X-0AR
Remo
ve the jammed paper according to the procedure that matches the location at which a paper jam occurred.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Output tr
ay
Paper Jams in the
Output Ar
ea(P. 677)
Back side
Paper Jams in the
Back Side
(P. 678)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Output tray/Back side
Paper Jams in the
Fr
ont and Back
Sides(P. 679)
Paper Jams in the Output Area
If the jammed paper cannot be r
emoved easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Gently pull out the paper.
2
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the scr
een.
Troubleshooting
677
Paper Jams in the Back Side
Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to
the next step.
1
Open the rear cover.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Lift the duplex unit.
4
Gently pull out the paper.
Troubleshooting
678
5
Close the rear cover.
Paper Jams in the Front and Back Sides
Do not for
cibly remove jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to
the next step.
1
Gently pull out the paper.
2
Open the rear cover.
3
Gently pull out the paper.
4
Close the rear cover.
Troubleshooting
679
Paper Jams in a Paper Source
1W2X-0AS
Remo
ve the jammed paper according to the procedure that matches the location at which a paper jam occurred.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Multi-purpose tr
ay
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 680)
Paper dr
awer
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 683)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Manual feed slot
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 682)
Paper drawer
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 683)
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray
If ther
e is paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove it rst. Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the
machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
1
Remove the jammed paper in the multi-purpose tray.
1
Gently pull out the paper.
2
Close the tray.
Troubleshooting
680
2
Remove the jammed paper inside the machine.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may
damage the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Press the green button.
The transport guide lowers.
3
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Push the transport guide back in.
Firmly pr
ess the transport guide until it clicks into place.
Troubleshooting
681
4
Set the paper drawer.
When you insert the paper dr
awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
5
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the scr
een.
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot
If the jammed paper cannot be r
emoved easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Remove the transport guide.
Hold the bottom of the manual feed slot, and pull out the tr
ansport guide.
Troubleshooting
682
3
Gently pull out the paper.
4
Carefully insert the transport guide straight in.
Firmly push the tr
ansport guide back in until it clicks into place.
5
Set the paper drawer.
When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
6
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the scr
een.
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
If the jammed paper cannot be r
emoved easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Troubleshooting
683
Mak
e sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
When the optional cassette feeding module is attached, gently pull out the paper in the same way
.
3
Set the paper drawer.
When you insert the paper dr
awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 569)
4
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the scr
een.
Troubleshooting
684
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
1W2X-0AU
If you cannot solve a pr
oblem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
If you disassemble or r
epair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the follo
wing information ready:
Product name (MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn)
Dealer where you purchased the machine
Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
Serial number (found on the label on the back side of the machine)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
Select <Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Serial Number>.
Troubleshooting
685
Appendix
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................................
687
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 689
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 690
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 691
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 693
Going Digital ................................................................................................................................................ 695
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 697
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 699
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 700
Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 704
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 705
Cassette Feeding Module-AF ........................................................................................................................ 709
Copy Card Reader-F ...................................................................................................................................... 710
Fax Function ................................................................................................................................................. 711
Scan Function ............................................................................................................................................... 712
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 713
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 715
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 718
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 720
Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 721
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 722
System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 724
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 726
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 727
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 728
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 731
Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 732
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 740
Appendix
686
Appendix
1W2X-0AW
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on ho
w to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
Machine Specications
See the following section(s) when you want to check the specications of the main unit and optional equipment,
network environment, print function, and so on.
Specications(P
. 699)
Using Optional Equipment
See the following section(s) when you want to check what options are available to use this machine more conveniently
and more effectively.
Options(P. 721)
Refer
encing the Manual of This Machine
See the rst of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of
the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this
manual), see the second section.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 726)
Using User's Guide(P. 727)
Others
See the follo
wing section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright
information.
Appendix
687
Third Party Software(P. 689)
Feature Highlights(P. 690)
Basic Windows Operations(P. 732)
Notice(P. 740)
Appendix
688
Third Party Software
1W2X-0AX
For information r
elated to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
Appendix
689
Feature Highlights
1W2X-0AY
This section describes tips for le
veraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features
according to your intended purposes and operating environment.
Going Green and Saving Money(P. 691)
Improving Eciency(P
. 693)
Going Digital(P. 695)
So Much More(P. 697)
Appendix
690
Going Green and Saving Money
1W2X-0C0
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet
You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from
your computer, and e
ven incoming faxes. Because you'll only
be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut
your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-sided
printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one sheet
of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet,
which is both economical and environmentally friendly.
Basic Copy Operations(P. 194)
Printing from a Computer(P. 256)
<Receive/Forward>(P. 548) <Fax Settings> <Print on
Both Sides>
<Receive/Forward>(P. 548) <I-Fax Settings> <Print
on Both Sides>
To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages
onto one side of a sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies,
and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent fr
om your
computer. This is even more effective when used
together with 2-sided printing.
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet
(N on 1)
(P. 208)
Printing from a Computer(P. 256)
Sleep Mode Paperless Faxing
Appendix
691
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that
powers down a machine when nobody is using it has
become an essential feature. This machine will enter
sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to
sleep whenever you want. Press once to put the
machine to sleep. Pr
ess it again to instantly wake the
machine back into action.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 179)
Assume you need paper to fax? Those old paper printouts
you always make are a thing of the past. Send documents
by fax just as they are, created on your computer. It's
paperless, so it's fast. And, received documents are rst
stored in memory, allowing you to print out only those
needed and eliminating worry about paper getting used on
direct mailings, etc.
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 242)
Saving Received Documents into the Machine
(Memory Reception)(P. 236)
Appendix
692
Improving Eciency
1W2X-0C1
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.
Address Book Frequently Used Settings in One Touch
Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves
you the inconvenience of entering them number-b
y-number,
letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. Display
the addresses you use most frequently with the <Favorites>
feature to quickly and easily send what you need to the people
who need it. You can save your Address Book data on your
computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact
information is backed up.
Registering Destinations(P. 181)
Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 427)
Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 216)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 431)
Always making 2-sided copies. Always scanning in
the same format and to the same save
destination. Fr
equently used settings like these
can be registered to a single shortcut button. This
is convenient by allowing you to specify involved
operations all in a single touch.
Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 173)
Print Images Right Off Your USB Memory Device Remote Management with Remote UI
Appendix
693
Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you can
print images and documents directly, without using a
computer. You can even preview JPEG and other images
before you print, so there is no wasted paper. You can also
scan handwritten memos, etc. and save them directly to a
USB memory device. Convenient for carrying about.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media
Print)(P. 267)
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer,
all without having to go over to the machine. Congure
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with
an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface
that you'll master immediately. Save your time and
energy for things other than taking care of the
machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote
UI)(P. 415)
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching
between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the pr
eview image in
the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make
settings while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 256)
Appendix
694
Going Digital
1W2X-0C2
Digitalizing a document enables editing using a computer as well as reducing cost and time by using e-mail.
Scan and E-Mail Scan and Share
E-mail scanned originals without even turning on
your computer. Just convert your scanned original
into an e-mail attachment right fr
om the machine. If
you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax
than mess around with a computer, this feature is for
you.
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide
meeting. Scan it, convert it, and no
w everyone can see it.
It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so
there's no need to print out copies and pass them out. Once
you start talking about hundreds of pages of documents
that everyone needs, there's just no other way to go.
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Scan Only What You Need Searchable PDFs
Appendix
695
What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but
all you're really interested in is a headline and a photo?
Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a
preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest.
Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop
out everything you don't need.
Using ScanGear MF(P. 319)
Using your pr
oduct to scan, print or otherwise
reproduce certain documents, and the use of
such images as scanned, printed or otherwise
reproduced by your product, may be
prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about
the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular
document, and/or of the use of the images
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,
you should consult in advance with your legal
advisor for guidance.
Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a
"
searchable PDF." By scanning an original with both
text and images, text portions are converted by OCR
into text data. In addition to being able to search for
text information, you can also copy required portions
into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in
Microsoft Oce. Eliminate the need to type in
customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 281)
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)
(P. 316)
Add Images to a Work in Progress
Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned
images dir
ectly into documents you're working on. This way you can skip the
steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images
and then exporting them to the application you're really using.
Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 317)
Appendix
696
So Much More
1W2X-0C3
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or e
ven on the road.
Using a smartphone/tablet Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal
you completed on a tablet while tr
avelling to a business
destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a
smartphone, Canon PRINT Business comes in handy. Even in
environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect
to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities
for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 321)
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or
cell phone, send your data, and out come your
printed documents. With this machine, Google
Cloud Print, and your mobile de
vice, print
whenever you want from wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
Keep Your Printouts Private Go Wireless
Appendix
697
Normally, when you print something from your
computer, it comes out of the printer right away.
However, if you have sensitive documents, this may not
be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one
will be able to print your documents without entering
your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't
let your condential documents lie exposed on the tray
for everyone to see.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure
Print)(P. 263)
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If
you've got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the
settings process altogether and be ready to go before
you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to
use document system that you can only get from
wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-
free wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-
PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)
Get Faxes Wherever You Go
Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of the oce. Set a forwar
ding
destination and any fax that comes in on the machine will go right to you. Better
yet, make the forwarding destination the e-mail address for your tablet or
mobile.
Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 238)
Appendix
698
Specications
1W2X-0C4
Specications ar
e subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Machine Specications
Main Unit(P. 700)
Feeder(P. 704)
Available Paper(P. 705)
Specications of Optional Equipment
Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 709)
Copy Card Reader-F(P. 710)
Functional Specications
Fax Function(P. 711)
Scan Function(P. 712)
Printer Functions(P. 713)
Management Functions(P. 715)
Envir
onment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 718)
Network Environment(P. 720)
Appendix
699
Main Unit
1W2X-0C5
For information on paper sizes and types for each paper sour
ce, see "
Available Paper(P. 705) ."
Type Desktop
Color Supported Full Color
Resolution for Reading 600 x 600 dpi
Resolution for Writing 600 x 600 dpi
Number of Tones 256
Acceptable Originals Up to 210 x 297 mm:
Sheet, book, three dimensional objects (up to 2 kg)
Copy Size/Copy Paper Paper Sizes
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm
*1
Min (Paper Drawer): 100 x 148 mm
Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 76.2 x 127 mm
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm
*1
Min: 76.2 x 127 mm
*1
Margin
Top: 5.0 ± 2.0 mm or less
Left: 5.0 ± 2.0 mm or less
Paper Weight
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Paper Drawer: 52 to 163 g/m²
*2
Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 to 176 g/m²
*2
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
52 to 163 g/m²
*1*2
Paper Type
Available Paper(P. 705)
Warm-Up Time
*3
After Powering ON
13.0 seconds or less
Returning fr
om the Sleep mode
Appendix
700
6.1 seconds or less
First Copy Time
(A4)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Full Color: 11.3 seconds
Black-and-White: 9.8 seconds
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Full Color: 14.0 seconds
Black-and-White: 12.0 seconds
Copy Speed
*4
(Plain A4, 100%)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Full Color: 27 sheets/minute
Black-and-White: 27 sheets/minute
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Full Color: 18 sheets/minute
Black-and-White: 18 sheets/minute
Magnication Regular Paper Size
Same Ratio
Enlar
gement: 141%, 200%, 400%
Reduction: 70%, 50%, 25%
Zoom
25 to 400 % (in 1 % increments)
Paper Feeding System/Capacity
*5
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Paper Drawer
250 sheets (80 g/m²)/250 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
50 sheets (80 g/m²)/50 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Paper Drawer
150 sheets (80 g/m²)/150 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
1 sheet
Paper Output System/Capacity
*5
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Output T
ray
150 sheets (75 g/m²)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Output Tray
100 sheets (75 g/m²)
Multiple Copies 999 sheets
Power Source 220 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Appendix
701
Power Consumption
*3
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Maximum Po
wer Consumption
1,400 W or less
During Sleep Mode
Approx. 0.8 W (USB connection)
Approx. 0.8 W (wired LAN connection)
Approx. 0.8 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.3 W or less
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
Maximum Power Consumption
850 W or less
During Sleep Mode
Approx. 0.94 W (USB connection)
Approx. 0.94 W (wired LAN connection)
Approx. 0.98 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.3 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw:
471 x 469 x 460 mm
MF732Cdw:
451 x 469 x 460 mm
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw:
451 x 460 x 400 mm
MF631Cn:
451 x 460 x 347 mm
Weight MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw:
Appr
ox. 26.5 kg (including toner cartridges)
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw:
Approx. 22.0 kg (including toner cartridges)
MF631Cn:
Approx. 19.5 kg (including toner cartridges)
Installation Space
*6
(W x D)
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw:
471 x 1,112 mm
MF732Cdw:
451 x 1,112 mm
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn:
451 x 1,011 mm
Appendix
702
Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB
Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10 to 30°C
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
*1
Including multi-purpose tr
ay
*2
For coated paper, the maximum acceptable paper weight is 200 g/m².
*3
May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*4
Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print
ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of
content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on
paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.
*5
May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
*6
When the paper drawer is pulled out and the multi-purpose tray and rear cover are opened.
Appendix
703
Feeder
1W2X-0C6
Original Feeding Mechanism MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF635Cx
Automatic 2-Sided Document Feeder
MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw
Automatic Document Feeder
Original Size/Type Size of Originals
Max : 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Min : 139.7 x 128 mm
W
eight of Originals
50 to 105 g/m²
Original Tray Capacity
50 sheets (80 g/m²)
*1
Original Scanning Speed
(A4)
Copying (600 dpi)
1-Sided Scanning:
Full Color: 14 pages/minute
Black-and-White: 27 pages/minute
2-Sided Scanning:
Full Color: 27 pages/minute
Black-and-White: 47 pages/minute
Scanning (300 dpi)
1-Sided Scanning:
Full Color: 14 pages/minute
Black-and-White: 27 pages/minute
2-Sided Scanning:
Full Color: 27 pages/minute
Black-and-White: 50 pages/minute
*1
Legal size paper: 30 sheets
Appendix
704
Available Paper
1W2X-0C7
The paper types that can be used with this machine ar
e shown in the following table.
Supported Paper Sizes
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer
*1
Multi-Purpose Tray
Automatic 2-Sided Printing
*2
A4
*3*4*5
B5
*3
A5
*3
Legal (LGL)
*3*4
Letter (LTR)
*3*4*5
Statement (STMT)
*3
Executive (EXEC)
Ocio
*3*4
Ocio (Brazil)
*3*4
Ocio (Me
xico)
*3*4
Letter (Government)
*3*4
Legal (Government)
*3*4
Foolscap/Folio
*3*4
Foolscap (Australia)
*3*4
Legal (India)
*4
3x5inch
*6
Envelope No.10 (COM10)
*7
Appendix
705
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer
*1
Multi-Purpose Tray
Automatic 2-Sided Printing
*2
Envelope Monarch
*6
*7
Envelope C5
*7
Envelope DL
*7
Custom Paper Size
*8
*9
*10
*1
Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF
.
*2
Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3
Allows you to print received fax documents.
*4
Allows you to print received I-Fax documents.
*5
Allows you to print reports or lists.
*6
For MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn only.
*7
For MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn, it is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum
print quality. Printing from the manual feed slot may produce skewed printouts.
*8
The following custom sizes are available.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw: 100 x 148 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn: 76.2 x 127 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm
*9
The custom size ranging from 76.2 x 127 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm is available.
*10
The following custom sizes are available.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw: 176 x 250 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn: 182 x 257 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Available : Unavailable
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
Paper Type
Paper Drawer
*1
Multi-Purpose Tray
Automatic 2-Sided Printing
*2
Plain L
*3*4
61 to 70 g/m²
Plain L2
*3
60 g/m²
Plain L3 52 to 59 g/m²
Plain 1
*3*4
71 to 82 g/m²
Plain 2
*3*4
83 to 90 g/m²
Appendix
706
Paper Type
Paper Drawer
*1
Multi-Purpose Tray
Automatic 2-Sided Printing
*2
Heavy 1 91 to 119 g/m²
Heavy 2 120 to 128 g/m²
Heavy 3 129 to 163 g/m²
Recycled 1
*3*4
60 to 70 g/m²
Recycled 2
*3*4
71 to 82 g/m²
Color
*3*4
71 to 82 g/m²
Coated 1 100 to 120 g/m²
Coated 2 121 to 150 g/m²
Coated 3 151 to 200 g/m²
Labels
Envelope
*1
Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF
.
*2
Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3
Allows you to print received fax/I-Fax documents.
*4
Allows you to print reports or lists.
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
Paper Type Paper Drawer Manual feed slot
Automatic 2-sided printing
*1
Plain L
*2*3
61 to 70 g/m²
Plain L2
*2
60 g/m²
Plain L3
*2
52 to 59 g/m²
Plain 1
*2*3
71 to 82 g/m²
Plain 2
*2*3
83 to 90 g/m²
Heavy 1 91 to 120 g/m²
Appendix
707
Paper Type Paper Drawer Manual feed slot
Automatic 2-sided printing
*1
Heavy 2 121 to 163 g/m²
Recycled 1
*2*3
60 to 70 g/m²
Recycled 2
*2*3
71 to 82 g/m²
Color
*2*3
71 to 82 g/m²
Coated 1 100 to 120 g/m²
Coated 2 121 to 150 g/m²
Coated 3 151 to 200 g/m²
*4
Labels
Envelope
*4
*1
Automatic 2-sided printing is available without r
eplacing paper.
*2
Allows you to print received fax/I-Fax documents.
*3
Allows you to print reports or lists.
*4
It is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual
feed slot may produce skewed printouts.
Appendix
708
Cassette Feeding Module-AF
1W2X-0C8
Paper Sizes
Max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Min: 100 x 148 mm
Paper Weight
52 to 163 g/m²
*1
Paper Drawers Capacity
*2
550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
437 x 469 x 136 mm
Weight Approx. 8.5 kg
*1
For coated paper, the maximum acceptable paper weight is 200 g/m².
*2
May vary depending on the installation envir
onment and paper to use.
Appendix
709
Copy Card Reader-F
1W2X-0C9
Available Cards Magnetic
Card Readout Method Magnetic readout
Magnetic Card Reading Direction Face up
Store/Replay Replay
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
88 x 96 x 40 mm (excluding the attachment kit and cable)
Weight Approx. 200 g (including the attachment kit and cable)
Appendix
710
Fax Function
1W2X-0CA
Telephone Line Used
*1
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Scan Line Density <200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>
G3: 8 pels
*2
/mm x 3.85 line/mm
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>
G3: 8 pels
*2
/mm x 7.7 line/mm
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>
G3: 8 pels
*2
/mm x 7.7 line/mm
<200 x 400 dpi (Superne)>
G3: 8 pels
*2
/mm x 15.4 line/mm
<400 x 400 dpi (Ultr
ane)>
G3: 16 pels
*2
/mm x 15.4 line/mm
Transmission Speed
*3
Super G3: 33.6 kbps
G3: 14.4 kbps
Compression Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Type Super G3, G3
Max. Sending Original Sizes Legal
Receiving Paper Sizes Legal to A5
Transmission Times
Approx. 3 seconds/page
*4
(ECM-JBIG, tr
ansmitting from the memory at 33.6 Kbps)
*1
Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this
case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
*2
Pels stands for pictur
e elements (pixels).
*3
With the Automatic Fallback function.
*4
Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
Appendix
711
Scan Function
1W2X-0CC
Type Color Scanner
Original Scanning Size (Max) 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Resolution (Max) 600 x 600 dpi
Scanning Speed Feeder(P. 704)
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Protocol Supported
*1
SMB, FTP, SMTP, MultiPass, MFNP
Output Format
*1
TIFF, JPEG (Single-Page), PDF
*1
Some formats ar
e not supported depending on the function.
Appendix
712
Printer Functions
1W2X-0CE
UFR II Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 705)
Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" on Main Unit(P. 700)
Resolution Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported Network Environment(P. 720)
Resident Fonts None
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
PCL/PS Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 705)
Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" on Main Unit(P. 700)
Resolution Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, Adobe PS 3
Protocol Supported Network Environment(P. 720)
Appendix
713
Resident Fonts
PCL fonts
MF735Cx / MF635Cx
93 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts, 2 OCR fonts
MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw / MF633Cdw
45 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts
PS fonts
136 Roman
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Memory Media Print Function
Printable File Formats JPEG (DCF/Exif 2.21 or earlier/JFIF)
TIFF (
JPEG/MH/MR/MMR compression)
PDF (Version 1.7)
Appendix
714
Management Functions
1W2X-0CF
Authentication Functions
LD
AP servers that are supported by the machine are Windows Server 2008/Server 2012 Active Directory.
The machine communicates with LDAP servers using LDAPv3.
UTF-8 is the supported character encoding used when the text data is transmitted between the machine and an
LDAP server.
Firewall Settings
Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.
IPSec
IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
Operating system Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012
Connection mode Transport mode
Key exchange protocol
IKEv1 (main mode)
Authentication method
Pr
e-shared key
Digital signature
Hash algorithm
(and key length)
HMAC-SHA1-96
HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
Die-Hellman (DH)
Group 1 (768 bits)
Group 2 (1024 bits)
Group 14 (2048 bits)
ESP
Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key
length)
AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
AH Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
Appendix
715
IPSec supports communication to a unicast addr
ess (or a single device).
The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
IPSec is unavailable in networks in which NAT or IP masquerade is implemented.
Registr
ation of Keys and Certicates
A certicate and key that can be generated by the machine conform to X.509v3. If you install a key or CA certicate
from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format
Ke
y: PKCS#12
*1
CA certicate: X.509v1 or X.509v3, DER (encoded binary), PEM
File extension
Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"
CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits), ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signatur
e algorithm
SHA1-RSA, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA
*2
, SHA512-RSA
*2
, MD5-RSA, MD2-RSA, SHA1-ECDSA,
SHA256-ECDSA, SHA384-ECDSA, or SHA512-ECDSA
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1
Requir
ements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.
*2
SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
The machine does not support use of a certicate r
evocation list (CRL).
Denition of "
Weak Encryption"
When <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.
Hash: MD4, MD5, SHA-1
HMAC: HMAC-MD5
Common key cryptosystem: RC2, RC4, DES
Public key cryptosystem:
RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024
bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)
Even when <Pr
ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>, the hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for
signing a root certicate, can be used.
Appendix
716
Import/Export of the Setting Data
See Setting Menu List(P. 439) .
Appendix
717
System Environment
1W2X-0CH
System Environment for WSD
Windo
ws Vista/7/8/10
System Requirements for the Remote UI
*1
Windows
Windows Vista/7/8/10
Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0 and later
macOS
Mac OS X 10.5.8 and later (except for Classic environment)
Safari 5.0.6 and later
E-mail/I-Fax Forwarding Server Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 2007
Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
Lotus Domino R6.0 and later
Sendmail 8.12.5 and later
E-mail/I-Fax Receiving Server Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 2007
Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
Lotus Domino R6.0 and later
Qpopper 2.53 and later
File Servers Available as Destinations for File
Transmission
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012
Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
macOS
Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
System Requirements for the Send Function
Setting Tool
OS
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
Web Browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 and later
Display
SVGA monitor (with at least 800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) that supports at
least 256 colors
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
Internet Explorer 9 or later
Microsoft Edge
Firefox
Firefox ESR
Chrome
*2
macOS
Safari
Firefox
Chrome
*2
Appendix
718
Linux
Fir
efox
iOS
Safari
*2
Android
Chrome
*2
System Requirements for NFC Function
Andr
oid 4.0 or later
*1
Befor
e changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
*2
Only when viewing manuals on the Internet
Appendix
719
Network Environment
1W2X-0CJ
Common Specications
Protocol Supported Communication Protocol
T
CP/IP (Frame type: Ethernet II)
Printing Protocol
LPD
RAW
WSD
Wir
ed LAN Specications
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Wir
eless LAN Specications
Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range 2.412 to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.98 dBm
Communication Mode
Infr
astructure Mode
Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode
128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
Appendix
720
Options
1W2X-0CK
Installing options on the machine enables you to use mor
e features.
Knowing What Types of Options are Available
Optional Equipment(P. 722)
System Options(P. 724)
Looking for Optional Equipment b
y Purpose
Adding a Paper Drawer
Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 722)
Sending Fax
es Manually, Making or Receiving Phone Calls
TELEPHONE 6 KIT(P. 722)
Using the Authentication Function to Manage Users b
y Department
Copy Card Reader-F(P. 722)
Appendix
721
Optional Equipment
1W2X-0CL
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized b
y using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 722)
TELEPHONE 6 KIT(P. 722)
Copy Card Reader-F(P. 722)
Cassette Feeding Module-AF
Installing this cassette feeding module enables you to load paper of a different
size than that of paper loaded in the standar
d paper drawer. This surely reduces
the time and labor for paper replacement.
TELEPHONE 6 KIT
This is a handset that can be connected to the machine. Use the handset when
you use the machine as a telephone. Also, use the handset when you send or
r
eceive faxes manually.
Copy Card Reader-F
This is a car
d authentication system that enables you to perform the login process of Department ID Management by
using a control card instead of entering a department ID. You can log in to the machine by inserting a control card and
log off by removing it.
Card slot
Insert the control card into the card slot when the login screen is displayed. Remove the control card from
the card slot after using the machine.
Appendix
722
Control card
Y
ou can use the control card shown below. Hold the card the front side up and insert in the direction
indicated on the card.
Appendix
723
System Options
1W2X-0CR
The machine performance can be enhanced e
ven more by installing system options.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 724)
Send PDF Security Feature Set(P. 724)
License Registration(P. 724)
Barcode Printing Kit
This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print barcodes, PCL must be
enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).
Send PDF Security Feature Set
You can enhance the security of PDF les with the Send PDF Security Feature Set. This option enables you to add a
digital signature to PDF les or to create encrypted PDF les when scanning originals.
License Registration
To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.
Obtaining a License Key
You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http://
www.canon.com/lms/license) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the
following numbers.
License Access Number
Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certicate that is included in the
package of the option.
Serial Number of the Machine
Check the serial number of the machine from the operation panel.
<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Serial Number>
Registering a License Ke
y
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 123)
2
Select <Management Settings>.
If the login scr
een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 134)
Appendix
724
3
Select <License/Other>
<Register License>.
4
Conrm the message on the scr
een, and select <OK>.
5
Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.
Registr
ation starts. Wait until the <Installation is complete. Changes will be effective after the main power
is turned OFF and ON.> message is displayed.
If
the <The feature required for installation is not present.> message is displayed, enable the functions
that are required to activate the option and register the license key again.
6
Select <Close>.
7
Restart the machine.
Appendix
725
Manuals and Their Contents
1W2X-0CS
The manuals listed belo
w are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup pr
ocedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw / MF631Cn
User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a W
eb browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specic topic.
Using User's Guide(P. 727)
Send Setting Guide This manual describes how to congur
e settings and prepare for sending
scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.
Appendix
726
Using User's Guide
1W2X-0CU
The User
's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.
Screen
Layout of User
's Guide(P. 728)
Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide.
Viewing User's Guide(P. 731)
Specifying Ho
w the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to vie
w the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
Y
ou can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 730) .
Appendix
727
Screen Layout of User's Guide
1W2X-0CW
The User
's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to vie
w important information you should know when using the machine.
Appendix
728
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congur
e and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
br
owser.
When
you click the icon, the current page may go dark and a pop-up window may appear. To return to
the page, click [Close] in the pop-up window.
Appendix
729
/
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Sear
ch
Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page
you ar
e looking for.
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages
containing all the k
eywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Sear
ch result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
The specied k
eyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
Appendix
730
Viewing User's Guide
1W2X-0CX
This section describes the marks, buttons, scr
eens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information ar
e indicated using the marks below.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and mak
e sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items
car
efully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or
property.
Indicates a clarication of an oper
ation, or contains additional explanations for a
procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel
Settings displayed on the operation panel
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the MF735Cx. Depending on the model
or oper
ating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from
the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the MF735Cx. When differences are
signicant, multiple illustr
ations are used with the model names, such as "MFXXX / MFXXX." The illustrations of
the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Cartridge 046.
Appendix
731
Basic Windows Operations
1W2X-0E0
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 732)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 733)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 734)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 734)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 735)
Checking the Computer Name(P. 736)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 737)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 738)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 739)
When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 739)
Depending on the computer that you use, the oper
ation may differ.
Displaying the Printer Folder
Windo
ws Vista
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windo
ws 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start]
select [Devices and Printers].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windo
ws 10
[
] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].
Windo
ws Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Windo
ws Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].
Enabling [Network disco
very]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network disco
very].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Appendix
732
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws 10
[
] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
disco
very] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start]
select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [File Explorer].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [File Explorer].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [File Explorer].
2
Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
T
o view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
Shar
ed printers are displayed.
Appendix
733
Displaying the [Softwar
e Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided DVD-
ROM, follow the procedure below. The DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The DVD-ROM drive
name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Sear
ch]
press the [ENTER] key.
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windo
ws 10
Enter "D:\MInst.exe" in the search box click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Windo
ws Server 2016
Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Printing a T
est Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose
T
ray(P. 149)
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
3
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
734
4
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
The test page is printed.
Checking the Bit Ar
chitecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
2
Display [System].
Appendix
735
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Click [
] [Settings] [System] select [About].
Windo
ws Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Oper
ating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
Checking the Computer Name
1
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 10
Click [
] select [Windows System] [Control Panel].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].
2
Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Appendix
736
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the computer name.
Checking the Printer Port
1
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
Appendix
737
3
In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer ar
e on the
same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard
TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 44)
Checking Bidir
ectional Communication
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 732)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
Appendix
738
Checking the SSID to Which Y
our Computer is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click
, , , or in the system tray to display the
SSID of the connected wir
eless LAN router.
When Printing or Sending fr
om the Windows Store App
Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you
use
[Print].
Windo
ws 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application
The driver that you use [Print].
If you print a document or send a fax using this method, only a limited number of functions ar
e available.
If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and perform the required operations. This message appears when the machine is set to display
the user name when printing documents, sending faxes or similar instances.
Appendix
739
Notice
1W2X-0E1
International ENERGY ST
AR Program
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, Canon has determined that this product meets the ENERGY
STAR Program for energy eciency.
The ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy saving
through the use of computers and other oce equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors
can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are oce equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
Pr
oduct Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby
MF735Cx / MF734Cdw / MF732Cdw 1.3 w
MF635Cx / MF633Cdw 1.6 w
The abo
ve value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
WEEE and Battery Dir
ectives
Appendix
740
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this pr
oduct is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-
europe.com/battery.
Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star ®
The Energy Star
®
programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star
®
programme for both environmental benets and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star
®
logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
Appendix
741
T
rademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorpor
ated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Appendix
742
The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other
countries.
Cop
yright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other
countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
 
V_160913
Appendix
743
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
V
ersion 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
744
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied V
ersions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
745
- 1 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
- 2 -
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PDF Scan Library 3
Adobe PostScript 3 6
expat 13
HarfBuzz 2012-07-30 14
libjingle 15
Lua
16
LuaSocket
17
MD4 18
Net-SNMP 19
OpenSSL 27
- 3 -
Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/
).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 4 -
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 5 -
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu . This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or
Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty
.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 6 -
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/
).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
- 7 -
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
- 8 -
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
- 9 -
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
- 10 -
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
- 11 -
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
- 12 -
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty
.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 13 -
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 14 -
HarfBuzz 2012-07-30
Copyright (C) 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright (C) 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner Lemberg
Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright (C) 2004,2007 Red Hat, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright
notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS,
OR MODIFICATIONS.
- 15 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 16 -
Lua
Copyright © 1994–2014 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 17 -
LuaSocket
LuaSocket 2.0.2 license
Copyright © 2004-2007 Diego Nehab
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 18 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 19 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 20 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 21 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 22 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 23 -
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 24 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 25 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 26 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 27 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 28 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 29 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 30 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
2


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Canon MF635 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Canon MF635 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 6,66 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Canon MF635

Canon MF635 User Manual - German - 809 pages

Canon MF635 User Manual - Dutch - 800 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info